JP2020065580A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing an advantageous right from being missed.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a variable display device that performs a variable display of identification information on the basis of winning of the game medium into a winning device and derives and displays the display result; holding storage means that stores holding information related to variable display that has not yet been started; promotion notification means that executes promotion notification prompting winning of the game medium into the winning device, in a predetermined period after an advantageous state is completed; and arrival notification means that executes arrival notification indicating that the upper limit number has been reached when the number of the holding information stored in the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number of the holding information which can be stored in the holding storage means, in a predetermined period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34-10

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In recent years, game machines have diversified in specifications and game methods. For example, when a big hit occurs again within a predetermined period after the end of a big hit, there is one that shifts to a more advantageous state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2013-94242, A

  In such a gaming machine, there is a problem in that the player may play the game without understanding it, and the player may lose the advantageous right.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an advantageous right from being missed.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays identification information based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result.
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces, etc.) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. Arrival notification means for executing notification (outputting "arrival", etc.) (production control microcomputer 100, etc.),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 43D and 43F).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. Moreover, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
After the advantageous state ends, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 11 times, etc.) that is equal to or more than the upper limit number, the advantageous state is re-established. (5) When controlled to a R jackpot and a big hit etc., it is possible to control to a special state (chance time B etc.) after the end of the advantageous state.

(3) Means 1 The gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The promotion notification means executes the promotion notification by temporarily stopping the identification information (promotion notification pattern or the like).

  With such a configuration, the interest can be improved by setting the notification mode to the temporary stop of the identification information.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
When the game medium wins, another winning device (first start winning port 13 or the like) that can start variable display on the variable display device,
Other holding storage means (first holding storage buffer or the like) that stores holding information for variable displays that have not been started yet among the variable displays that can be started by winning the game medium in the other winning device. When,
The execution time (2000 ms, etc.) of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the other hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state is based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state. It is shorter than the execution time of variable display (60000 ms etc.),
While the variable display is being executed based on the suspension information stored in the other suspension storage unit after the end of the advantageous state, the promotion notification unit is another promotion notification different from the promotion notification (“right hit”). Output).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute another promotion notification according to the short variable display time.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
The predetermined period is a period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state.

(6) The gaming machine according to (5),
When it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the advantageous state (when the hold sequence is determined), the arrival notification unit is configured to notify the arrival notification. The notification is made in a specific mode different from the notification mode (such as outputting "Congratulations").

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within the predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to the advantageous state by the specific mode, so that the player's excitement It can enhance the feeling.

(7) The gaming machine according to (5),
The arrival notification means executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the identification information (arrival notification pattern or the like).

  With such a configuration, the interest can be improved by setting the notification mode to the temporary stop of the identification information.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
The variable display device has a plurality of spinning drums (reels) provided with a plurality of types of identification information (blue 7, red 7, promotion notification symbol, arrival notification symbol, blank symbol, etc.) on the surface, and the plurality of rotations. A plurality of display areas are formed in which the plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by rotating the body,
When the remaining time of the predetermined period is less than or equal to a specific time (15 seconds, etc.), the number of pieces of hold information stored by the hold storage means has reached the upper limit number of hold information that can be stored in the hold storage means. At this time, the arrival notifying unit executes the arrival notification by voice without temporarily stopping the identification information.

  With such a configuration, the arrival notification can be performed while ensuring the stopping operation time of the rotating cylinder.

(9) First variable display means (variable display of the first special symbol, etc.) and first variable display means (first special symbol display 8a, etc.), and second variable display (variable display of the second special symbol, etc.) And a second variable display means (second special symbol display device 8b, etc.) for performing the display result in either the first variable display means or the second variable display means is a specific display result (big hit display result, etc.). ) Is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
First holding storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, first holding storage buffer, etc.) that stores information relating to the first variable display by the first variable display means as holding storage information;
Second holding storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, second holding storage buffer, etc.) for storing information on the second variable display by the second variable display means as holding storage information,
The second variable display of the second variable display means based on the hold storage information of the second hold storage means is more preferable than the first variable display of the first variable display means based on the hold storage information of the first hold storage means. Priority control means (game control microcomputer 560, S52 to S54 of FIG. 12, etc.) for performing control to be executed with priority,
Based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, at least the second variable display is controlled to a time saving state in which the variable display is more likely to be variably displayed than the normal state for a predetermined number of times of variable display (game control microcomputer 560, FIG. 14). S163 to S170, etc.),
A time saving remaining number display means (effect display device 9, time saving remaining number image 96, etc.) that displays the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state.
And a remaining number display control means capable of controlling the display of the remaining number (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S925 to S929 of FIG. 33-2 (B), etc.),
The time saving control means includes at least a first condition that the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display during the time saving state becomes a first number (11 times, etc.), and the time during the time saving state. The time saving state is terminated based on the satisfaction of either one of the second condition that the number of times of the second variable display becomes the second number of times (7 times, etc.) that is smaller than the first number of times (game). Control microcomputer 560, setting of time saving state of FIG. 2, S142 to S151 of FIG. 13),
The remaining number display control means displays the remaining number when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number is displayed for the second variable display during the time saving state. It is possible to control the display so that the display is not performed (FIGS. 33-1 (C), (D), and the time-shortening remaining number display deletion setting in S912 of FIG. 33-2).

  With such a configuration, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

(10) First variable display means (variable display of the first special symbol, etc.) to perform first variable display means (first special symbol display 8a, etc.), and second variable display (variable display of the second special symbol, etc.) And a second variable display means (second special symbol display device 8b, etc.) for performing the display result in either the first variable display means or the second variable display means is a specific display result (big hit display result, etc.). ) Is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
First holding storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, first holding storage buffer, etc.) that stores information relating to the first variable display by the first variable display means as holding storage information;
Second holding storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, second holding storage buffer, etc.) for storing information on the second variable display by the second variable display means as holding storage information,
The second variable display of the second variable display means based on the hold storage information of the second hold storage means is more preferable than the first variable display of the first variable display means based on the hold storage information of the first hold storage means. Priority control means (game control microcomputer 560, S52 to S54 of FIG. 12, etc.) for performing control to be executed with priority,
Based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, at least the second variable display is controlled to a time saving state in which the variable display is more likely to be variably displayed than the normal state for a predetermined number of times of variable display (game control microcomputer 560, FIG. 14). S163 to S170, etc.),
A time saving remaining number display means (effect display device 9, time saving remaining number image 96, etc.) that displays the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state.
And a remaining number display control means capable of controlling display of the remaining number (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S925 to S929 of FIG. 33-4 (B), etc.),
The time saving control means includes at least a first condition that the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display during the time saving state becomes a first number (11 times, etc.), and the time during the time saving state. The time saving state is terminated based on the satisfaction of either one of the second condition that the number of times of the second variable display becomes the second number of times (7 times, etc.) that is smaller than the first number of times (game). Control microcomputer 560, setting of time saving state of FIG. 2, S142 to S151 of FIG. 13),
The remaining number display control means displays the remaining number when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number is displayed for the second variable display during the time saving state. It is possible to perform display control without updating (time saving remaining number update limit display setting in S912A in FIGS. 33C, 33D, and 33A).

  With such a configuration, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, the embodiment of the invention described below includes the invention according to (11) below. Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-101428, at the start of the reach effect, there is a title display for notifying the type of the reach effect. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is desired to enhance the effect of presentation, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of presentation.

(11) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 43D and 43F).
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

(12) In the gaming machine of (11) above,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the specific period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 43 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(13) In the gaming machine of (11) or (12) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, development effect or notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be set during the specific period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (13) above,
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above,
The rate of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (15) above,
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to the title notified in the specific period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (16) above,
Detection means (for example, a stick controller 9031A or a push button 9031B) capable of detecting the movement of the player,
A specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) to perform a specific display execution means (for example, CPU90120 for effect control),
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 51 (E), FIG. 52 (I)),
During the effective period of the detection by the detection means, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 52 (J) and 52 (K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (17) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 53A) Etc.) and a second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (e.g., reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed at the time of reaching the reach title shown in FIG. 53D) (for example, an image). A display device 905 and a CPU 90120 for effect control,
The display means is
A plurality of types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 53A and 53D) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. 53 (a) and (d), the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 53 may include the elements E1 to E5.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the specific image is displayed.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a variation example of the first and second special symbols in the first time saving state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows a small hit opening pretreatment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device showing the effect image of the round suggestion effect. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device showing the effect image of the pending continuous notification effect. It is a timing chart of the suspension consecutive notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data table used when selecting the production mode of round number suggestive production. It is an explanatory view showing a pending continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. It is a flow chart which shows reservation continuation and the number suggestion production processing of a round. It is the flowchart which shows the number suggestion production processing of round. It is a flow chart which shows the reservation continuous notification production 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows a reservation consecutive information production second process. It is the display screen figure of the production display which shows the production image of specific production. It is a timing chart of specific production. It is a flow chart which shows specific production 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows specific production 2nd processing. It is a display screen diagram of an effect display device showing a first display control example of the number of remaining hours saved. It is a flowchart which shows the process performed by the effect control microcomputer in order to perform the effect display of the remaining number of time saving shown in FIG. It is a display screen diagram of an effect display device showing a second display control example of the remaining number of hours saved. It is a flowchart which shows the process performed by the effect control microcomputer in order to perform the effect display of the remaining time reduction number shown in FIG. 33-3. FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of a display area in the vicinity of a remaining time reduction display section showing an example of a remaining time reduction update lock display control. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device showing a specific notification example. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a main board (game control board). It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table and a big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of promotion notification and arrival notification. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the number of reservations and a notification mode. It is a figure which shows the timing chart during a time saving when there is no special 1 reservation. It is a figure which shows the aspect of a variable display device etc. in area A, B, and achievement production. It is a figure which shows a timing chart during a time saving when there is special 1 reservation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a timing chart for saving time during a case where the right reel is not stopped. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during the 1st time saving fluctuation. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows time saving fluctuation processing. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing a decision rate in notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is an explanatory view showing a game suggested effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a puzzle effect determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a puzzle effect mode determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit mid-course suggestion effect determination table, a role effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of puzzle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of puzzle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of puzzle effect. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing opening and closing of a gaming machine frame in Modification 1; It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a game frame (not shown) attached to the inside of the outer frame so that the game frame can be opened and closed, and a game frame that can be opened and closed. The glass door frame 2 is formed in a frame shape.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the bottom of the hitting ball supply plate 3, when a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supplying plate 3 and a game ball as a game medium are shot as a hit ball from a hitting ball launching device. A hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for operation is provided. At the back of the glass door frame 2, a game board 6 having a game area 7 in which the driven game balls can flow down is detachably attached. A large number of game nails are planted in the game area 7. In the game area 7, some of the game nails are shown. The hitting ball launching device is driven by a launching motor, and the force (firing strength) for hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the turning operation position of the hitting ball operation handle 5. Thereby, the player can shoot a game ball aiming at a desired place in the game area 7.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, a production display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) production symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. In the game area 7, the first path of the downflow path along which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in an area on the left side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front, and is the first downflow path along which the game ball flows down. A second route different from the one route is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

  Hitting a game ball in the left side area (left side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to make the game ball flow down to the first path is called left hitting. Driving the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to make the game ball flow down to the second path is called right hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area 7, and thus may be called a left hitting route. Further, the second route may be called a right-handed route because the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area 7.

  It should be noted that the first route and the second route may be configured by different routes or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be divided, for example, by the end surface of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of the game nails, or the like.

  When the ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball hitting handle 5 and is driven into the game area 7, the game ball is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example, when it is guided to the left game area. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the left game area.

  A first starting winning opening 13 is provided as a structure into which a game ball hit in the left game area of the game area 7 can enter. The first start winning opening 13 is arranged below the effect display device 9. The first starting winning opening 13 is provided with a first starting winning opening switch 13a as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered.

  The gate 32, the variable winning ball device 15, and the V determination winning device 87 are provided as a structure into which the game ball hit in the right game area of the game area 7 can enter. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second starting winning port 14 in which a game ball can be won. Further, as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered each, a gate switch 32a inside the gate 32, a second start winning opening switch 14a inside the second starting winning opening 14, a V determination winning device Inside the 87, a V winning switch 87a, a V judging winning switch 15a and a V judging discharging switch 15b are provided respectively. Hereinafter, the game ball winning (entering) the first starting winning opening 13 is also referred to as a first starting winning prize, and the gaming ball winning (entering) the second starting winning opening 14 is also referred to as a second starting winning prize.

  The first start winning hole 13 is a game ball (starting winning ball) enters (winning prize) as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) Possible winning structure. The second start winning opening 14 is a game ball (starting winning ball) enters (winning prize) as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) Possible winning structure.

  The gate 32 is a gate structure through which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbols are variably displayed. Ordinary symbols will be described later. In the left game area, game nails are planted so that the game balls are guided to the first start winning hole 13 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning opening 13, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening 14 and the gate 32 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14 and the gate 32, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

  It should be noted that it is possible to allow the game ball that has been struck in the right game area to enter the first start winning hole 13, but from the viewpoint of playability, that possibility is struck in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that game balls will enter them. On the contrary, it may be possible that the game balls hit in the left game area enter the gate 32 and the second starting winning opening 14, but from the viewpoint of playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low in comparison with the possibility that the game balls hit in the game area enter them.

  The V determination winning device 87 is a device for determining a V winning of a game ball which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

  The V determination winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes through the inside. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided at the top with a width that allows game balls to pass in the front-rear direction, and has walls on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A portion is provided, and a guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed along the path. At the center of the guideway, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) × 9 times + ending period 1 second) By repeating opening and closing, an operating port is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more game balls can be won within a predetermined period of opening. The passage of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball in such a manner that a plurality of protrusions alternately project on both sides of the wall portion, so that when the player hits the ball to the right. , V determination winning device 87 is provided with a structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which a game ball slowly flows in a passage above an operation port.

  In the small hitting game state, until the entry of ten game balls into the V determination winning device 87 is detected, or a predetermined period of time elapses, the V determination winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time. The opening control is executed. During such a release control period, the number of rounds suggestive effect shown in FIG. 20 and the continuous holding notification effect shown in FIG. 21, which will be described later, are provided so that the player does not feel it when the open control is extended. It is possible to execute such a particular effect. In the V-judgment winning device 87, a portion of the guideway where the operation opening is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 is provided at a position where the actuating port can be opened and closed so as to move forward and backward on the actuating port.

  The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operating port. In the state where the operating port is closed by the state of the movable portion 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable portion 872 and the fixed portion 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. To do. In a state in which the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port opens in the guideway, so that the game ball guided to the guideway can fall from the operating port into the V determination prize winning device 87. Become.

  Inside the V determination winning device 87 (operating port), a V winning region 870 as a specific region is a center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V determination winning device 87 as a winning region in which a game ball that has entered from the operating port can win. Further, an inclined path 871 is provided which is provided in the section and guides all the game balls that have entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 by an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which the game ball can enter, and can guide the gaming ball entering from the V winning hole downward.

  At the uppermost end of the V winning area (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, there is provided a plate-like opening / closing member (not shown) capable of switching the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state. There is. The opening / closing member is driven by the solenoid 24 and can be moved forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. In the state where the V winning opening is opened due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided over the V winning area 870 passes over the opening / closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. It is possible to fall into a prize-winning ball area (not shown) in which a game can be guided downward.

  Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and one gaming ball is in the small hitting gaming state in which the working opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened. When the player enters the V winning area 870 and wins the prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small hitting game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a, the opening / closing member is controlled to be in the closed state, and the game ball guided thereafter on the V winning area 870 is within the winning ball area. Will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one gaming ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a, and subsequent gaming balls are detected by the V determining winning switch 15b.

  When the total number of balls detected by the V prize winning switch 15a and the V judgment prize winning switch 15b reaches 10, the V determination prize device 87 opened in the small hitting game state closes the operation port and the game ball enters. Impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to join together at the lower side, and the gaming ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the joined discharge passage has a predetermined size inside the game board 6. It is discharged to the discharge path. The discharge passage is provided with a V determination discharge switch capable of detecting the discharged game balls, and all the game balls discharged by the switch are detected.

  When a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened, a game ball is won in the V winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , The jackpot occurrence conditions are established, and the jackpot is controlled in a gaming state. The winning of the game ball in the V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, during the period in which the small hit occurs and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as described above, a total of about 10 gaming balls are averaged without requiring a special operation. Has a structural design and control design so that it can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and when a game ball can enter the V-judging winning device 87, the gaming ball is always (100%) in the V-winning area. The structure is designed so as to enter 870. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-handing promotion notification for instructing a right-handing is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball on the V determination winning device 87. It

  Therefore, when a small hit occurs, a right-handed stroke should be made except when the player does not shoot a game ball or when the player makes a left-handed hit during the opening period of the working opening of the V-judgment winning device 87. For example, a (100%) game ball will surely enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

  In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-decision winning apparatus 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation port that allows the game ball to be dropped is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to enter about 10 game balls into the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operating port is opened 10 times.

  On a part of the front surface side of the V determination winning device 87, a V lamp 875 which is a light emitting body made of an LED formed in a character shape of “V” is provided. The V lamp 875 basically emits white light when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state. The V lamp 875 can emit light basically in white, but the emitted color can be changed to blue, red, and iridescent depending on the game situation, such as when notifying the holding station. Is. Note that the V lamp 875 may be provided on the front surface portion or inside the V determination winning device 87 as long as it is visible to the player. Further, the V lamp 875 may be provided at a position different from the V determination winning device 87 (for example, a position near the V determination winning device 87).

  The variable winning ball device 15 is a variable winning ball device that changes between a state in which the player can enter the game ball (open state) and a state in which the player cannot enter the game ball (closed state). It is equipped with a tulip-shaped opening wing piece (a pair of left and right shapes) at the entrance, and a stopper member is provided above the opening wing piece to restrict the entry of game balls when the opening wing piece is closed. Has been. This open blade is driven by the solenoid 16. The variable winning ball device 15 is changed from an unfavorable state to the advantageous state for the player by opening for a certain period (for example, 1 second) when the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the prize, it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

  It should be noted that it may be possible that the game balls hit in the left game area enter either the variable winning ball device 15 or the V determination winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared with the possibility that the game balls hit in the right game area enter them.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 capable of performing various effect displays such as effects corresponding to variable display of special symbols. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, as a variable display means for variably displaying special symbols as plural kinds of identification information capable of identifying each other, a first special symbol display for variably displaying the first special symbol. A device 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each are provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is composed of a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). On the display screen of the effect display device 9, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, various images such as variable display of the effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each are displayed. A display area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area (symbol display area) that variably displays three decorative (for production) effect symbols (also referred to as ornamental symbols) of “left”, “middle”, and “right” Is formed.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the production display is executed on the production display device 9 along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display device 8b is used. When the variable display of the 2 special symbols is being executed, if the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). I have something to do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 8a and 8b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device. When only one special symbol display device is provided, only one starting winning opening may be provided. In addition, even if only one special symbol display is provided, two (plural) starting winning openings are provided, and one special symbol display is provided when a game ball wins in any of the starting winning openings. The display may be changed. Further, when two (a plurality of) special symbol display devices are provided, one start winning opening is provided, and two special symbol display devices are variably displayed in a predetermined order (for example, variably displayed for each one-time starting prize). It may be controlled such as switching the special symbol display device.

  Below the game area 7, a jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided. In the big hit variable winning ball device 20, a game ball hit right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. In addition, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of implantation of the game nail.

  The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 has a jackpot opening whose front surface is covered with a rectangular door. When a jackpot occurs, the solenoid 21 causes the door to tilt forward about the bottom side to reveal the jackpot opening. (Open). Inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 for detecting the game ball that has entered is provided. To the big hit variable winning ball device 20, a winning route is provided by a game nail or other structure so that the gaming ball can be won in the special winning opening only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. It is restricted. It should be noted that even when the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area, the player may be allowed to win the special winning opening.

  When a game ball wins any one of the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the big hit variable winning ball device 20, and the V determination winning device 87, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to each of them. Is paid out. The prize balls may be paid out even when the game balls pass through the gate 32. Further, with respect to at least one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the winning balls may not be paid out even if the gaming balls win.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an outlet 26 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, four speakers 27 for producing a sound effect or a voice as a predetermined voice output are provided on the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

  Big hit, when the big hit design (big hit display result) is displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit design (big hit display result) is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, respectively Occurs in. When it is determined to be a big hit by lottery based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning hole 13, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a. When it is determined to be a big hit by a lottery based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b.

  The big hit also occurs when the game ball that has entered when the working opening of the V determination winning device 87 is open due to the small hit game state entering the V winning area 870. Hereinafter, the game ball entering the V winning area 870 and detected by the V winning switch 87a is called a V winning. The small hit is a hit in which the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value addition, and a big hit can be generated on condition of the V winning. In the V determination winning device 87, the game state in which the operating opening is opened is called a "small hitting game state". And, in the small hitting game state, the big hit which is generated on the basis of the fact that the game ball wins V is called “the big hit via the small hit”. On the other hand, based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b, the big hit game state is called "big hit by special symbol".

  The big hit game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player for giving a predetermined value, and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 repeats an open state and a closed state for a predetermined number of times to perform repeated continuation control. In the repeated continuation control, the state where the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened (the big winning opening is opened) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

  In the big hit game state, after the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a predetermined ending condition of the open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) The closed condition is established in accordance with the satisfaction of the opening end condition) that the winning balls of (1) have been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition) that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, a game ball is After having passed (including winning) the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 as the starting winning area, the start condition of the variable display (for example, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Display is not being executed, and started based on the fact that the jackpot game is not being executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. It should be noted that the passage of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening and a gate, and the concept includes that the gaming ball has entered (wins) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display).

  In addition, regarding the variable display in which the starting condition is not yet established even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, within a predetermined upper limit number. Storing information about variable display for which the start condition has not been established yet is called pending storage. Further, such a term “reserved storage” is also used to indicate (specify) information stored in a reserved manner. The reserved memory is also called a start memory or a start winning prize memory.

  Regarding the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 13. Regarding the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14. When a big hit occurs in a state where such a first hold storage or a second hold storage exists, the hold storage existing before the big hit occurrence is maintained as it is, and the variable display is displayed after the end of the big hit game state. Used for.

  When the second starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, even if there is a hold memory of the first starting winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is executed preferentially. To be done. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Above the first special symbol display device 8b and the second special symbol display device 8b, the second consisting of one display device for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning port 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. A special symbol hold storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol reservation storage display 18b, every time there is an effective start winning, the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b is turned on, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, The second special symbol hold storage display 18b is turned off.

  Further above the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b, the first special symbol reserved memory display consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number. A container 18a is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a increases the number of the indicator which lights every time there is an effective starting winning. Then, each time the variation display on the first special symbol display device 8a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays ordinary symbols that can be identified. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 10 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display device 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small-sized display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7"), it becomes a hit, and the variable winning ball device 15 is limited to a predetermined time from a closed state which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an open state, which is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 10, a normal symbol hold storage display device 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32, the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 increases the LED to be turned on by 1. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the LED to be turned on is decremented by 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a stick controller 122 that can be held by a player and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left and right). A predetermined instruction operation is performed on the stick controller 122 by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with the operating hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) capable of operating is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 125 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. Is built in. Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate and the like below the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  In the member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3, for example, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 is provided inside the main body of the upper plate or the like at the installation position of the push button 120.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots a game ball such that "left hitting" which aims at the left game area and "right hitting" which aims at the right game area are selectively used to change. The game state and the production state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

  When the player sits in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game ball so that the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 13 by left-handed hitting. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the display result is a big hit (a big hit due to the special symbol), the game is aimed at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 which is switched from left hitting to right hitting. . After the jackpot game state is finished, a right-handing promotion notification is given on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to play the game by right-handing. Specifically, a display such as "Aim right" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9.

  During the big hit game state, a game is conducted in which the open big hit variable winning ball device 20 is aimed by hitting it to the right. During the big hit game state, a right-handed promotion notification is given. After the jackpot game state is over, if a time saving state described later is reached, the game is continued by hitting the right. After the jackpot game is over, a time saving notification is made on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the time saving status is started if the time saving status is reached. In addition, during the time saving state, the right-handing promotion notification is also performed. If it does not become a time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state is over, the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot gaming state is finished, so that the game ball is switched from right-handed to left-handed and the game ball is won in the first start winning port 13. Play the game as you would. When the time saving state is not reached, a left-handing promotion notification (also referred to as left-handing notification) is given on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to return to left-handing and play the game. May be.

  During the short time period after the big hit game is over, a game is played by aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning opening 14 by right-handing. If the game ball wins the second start winning hole 14, and the display result is a big hit (big hit due to a special symbol), a game is carried out aiming at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 while right-handed. Also, if a game ball wins the second start winning port 14 and the display result is a small hit display result, the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the small hit game state, so V is left hitting right. A game is played aiming at the determination winning device 87. At the start of the small hitting game state, a small hitting start notification for notifying that the small hitting game state is started on the screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. In addition, when it is controlled to the small hitting game state, it is executed before a specific timing (before the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened according to the small hitting, which will be described later depending on the game situation). At the start timing of the hit display or a predetermined timing before the small hit display is executed, the right-handing promotion notification is also given.

  When the working hole of the V determination winning device 87 is in the open state due to the small hitting game state, the game ball falls inside the V judging winning device 87 from the working port, enters the V winning area 870, and is detected. When a V winning occurs, a big hit via a small hit occurs. When a V prize is generated, V prize notification for notifying that a V prize has been generated is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. When the small hitting game state ends, a small hitting end notification is made on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, after the small hit ends, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened. Therefore, the player aims at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 and plays the game.

  Further, when a game is aimed at the V determination winning device 87 in the small hitting game state, when the game ball does not enter the V winning region 870 but enters a non-specific region (not shown) other than the V winning region 870. A big hit does not occur. In this way, when the V winning is not generated during the small hitting game state, the V winning failure notification for notifying that the V winning has failed is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. Further, at the end of the small hitting game state, a small hitting end notification is made on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify the end of the small hitting game state. Then, after the end of the small hitting game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to right-handedly aim the variable winning ball device 15 and play the game. When the time saving state has ended, the game is played so that the right-handed ball is switched to the left-handed ball and the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 13. At the end of the time saving state, a time saving end notification for notifying that the time saving has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9 and a left hit promotion notification for prompting the player to return to left hit and play a game are given.

  FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The hit type table shows, for each type of hit, a big hit occurrence condition, a control state (game state) after the big hit, a number of times of opening (number of rounds) in the big hit, and an opening time of each round in the big hit. In this embodiment, as a type of big hit, symbol 15R hour / hour big hit, symbol 4R hour / hour big hit, small hit via 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R hour / short hit, and small hit via 5 ( 4) R time short and big hit. The number in the parenthesis of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened.

  The small hit occurs when the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and the display result of the second special symbol becomes the small hit symbol. Whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a small hit symbol is determined in advance by random number lottery (small symbol judgment of the special symbol). When a small hit occurs, the small hit game state is entered, and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of times of opening is 10 and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base described later) after the end of the small hit game state is the same as before the small hit. In the small hit, the prize balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the V prize area 870 in the V determination prize device 87 during the small hit game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated during the small hitting game state, and about 30 winning balls can be paid out in accordance with the winning balls.

  When the game opening of the V determination winning device 87 is open, a game ball is won in the opening, and when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V determination winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. To do. Such a big hit via a small hit is called a big hit via a big hit as described above. Big hit via big hit includes small hit via 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R hour / hour big hit, and small hit via 5 (4) R hour / hour big hit. Be done. The small hit that is linked so as to be the 16 (15) R hour-shortening big hit is called the first small hit. 9 (8) R The small hit that is linked so as to be a short-time big hit is called the second small hit. 5 (4) R Small wins that are tied so as to be R / T short wins are called third wins.

  On the other hand, the big hit that is directly generated by the variable display of the special symbol without passing through the small hit is called a symbol big hit. As the symbol big hit, there is a symbol 15R time short jackpot that directly occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a symbol 4R time short jackpot.

  In this way, as the big hit, the symbol big hit which is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the small prize based on the variable display of the second special symbol are generated by the V winning. It includes a big hit and a big hit. Each big hit of the symbol big hit and the small big hit via big hit is a big hit that is controlled in a time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and is named as a time saving big hit. The advantageous state that is advantageous to the player in the present embodiment also includes opening of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20.

  Here, the time saving state will be described. The time saving state is an example of a special game state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player. The time saving state is a control state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol (effect symbol) is shorter than the non-time saving state (normal state). In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so when it is in the time saving state, an effective starting winning is likely to occur and a jackpot game may be performed. Increase.

  In the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened, the frequency of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased to facilitate the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 ( It is controlled to a high base state, which makes it highly approachable and highly frequent.

  Here, the "base" is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls in accordance with the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. The "high base state" is a state in which positive control for increasing this ratio is performed. On the other hand, the state where such control is not performed is the "low base state". Such control is realized, for example, as control for increasing the occurrence of a start winning that triggers the start of variation of the special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip) is opened to the variable winning ball device by increasing the opening frequency or the number of times of opening, or lengthening the opening time once. It can be realized as a control that facilitates winning. Such control is also referred to as "electrical Chu support control". In other words, the high base state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 that is the trigger for the variation of the special symbol to be in the open state, the frequency of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased and variable. This is a control state in which the winning of the winning ball device 15 is facilitated (increased entry, increased frequency). "Den Chu support control" is generally called by the abbreviation "Den support", and the abbreviation "Den support" may also be used in this embodiment.

  Further, the high base control (electrical Chu support control) will be described in detail. As a high base control (electricity Chu support control), the control of displaying and displaying the display result early by shortening the variation time of the ordinary symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) (normal symbol shortening) Control), control for increasing the probability that a stop symbol of a normal symbol will be a winning symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (ordinary electric accessory) (opening time extension control), and , The control for increasing the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device, which is a trigger for the variation of the special symbol (the opening number increasing control), is performed. When such control is performed, compared to when the control is not performed, the time ratio in which the variable winning ball device that is the trigger for changing the special symbol is in the open state is high, so the game ball is started. It becomes easy to win the prize (the execution condition of the variable display on the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established).

  Further, the symbol 15R hour-short jackpot is a jackpot in which the special winning opening is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R hour-short jackpot is a jackpot in which the special winning opening is opened four times (4R). In the case of 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot via small hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the special winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 16 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is practically 15 times, and the player is a big hit similar to the symbol 15R short-time big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel like a type. In the case of 9 (8) R short-time big hit via small hit, the big prize opening is opened 8 times (8R) after the V determination winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times) Is. In the case of 5 (4) R short-time big hit via small hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened four times (4R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device is opened for 5 rounds, but the number of big winning openings is practically 4 times, and the player is a big hit similar to the symbol 4R short-time big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel like a type.

  The time saving state after the symbol 4R time-short and big hit is the ending condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1, and the ending condition that the total number of the variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set. In this way, the number of times of the time saving end condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 is that the gaming balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. Has been set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is once, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, may generate a big hit via a small hit. There are times.

  The number of times of end condition of the time saving that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 is set for the following reason. In the case of the symbol 4R time saving big hit, basically, the time saving state (including the electric support state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make a right hit to enter the game ball into the gate 32 to open the variable winning ball device 15 and open the variable winning ball device 15 in that state. There is a case where it takes time to win a game ball, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold is variably displayed first.

  Therefore, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol due to the reserved memory based on the first starting prize that can be stored up to four before the game state is started, the second special symbol which is easy to be decided as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player 1 This is a condition for surely enabling the variable display of batches. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol due to the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, and thus, in the time saving state, it is easy to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player. It can be prevented that the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed.

  After the big hit other than the symbol 4R short-time big hit, the ending condition that the variable display count of the second special symbol is 7 times, and the ending condition that the total number of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times as the end condition of the time saving state is set in consideration that the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R time short and big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. Is significantly higher. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit and to increase the expectation of the player about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit.

  In addition, the end condition that the total number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variation display of the first special symbol due to the pending memory based on the first start winning prize that can be stored up to four before the game state is started, 7 of the second special symbol that is likely to be decided as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of times of fluctuation can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol due to the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that the jackpot which is advantageous to the player in the time saving state is likely to be determined. It is possible to prevent the number of times the second special symbol changes from decreasing.

  In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first start winning port 13 is provided so that the winning can be made from the first route, so it is better if the game ball flows down the first route. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winning than the game ball flowing down the two routes. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as the big hit game state, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second route, so that the game ball flowing down the second route is the first route. It is more advantageous for the player in winning the jackpot than when the game ball flows down. Further, in a specific state such as a small hit game state, since the V determination winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second route, the one in which the game ball flows down the second route is the first route. It is more advantageous to the player in that a big hit occurs than when the game ball flows down.

  Not limited to such comparison of advantages, for example, another winning opening (for example, another variable winning opening (whether for starting winning or non-starting winning) may be the first route. And the second route, in the low base state as a normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning port than the second route, the high base state, the big hit game state, and the small In other states, such as the winning game state, the second route is easier to win the variable winning port than the first route, from another viewpoint, in the normal state, the game medium is the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and it is advantageous for the player for the game medium to flow down the second path in other game states.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I / O port unit. Including 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a 1-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, and hence the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or executes). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used for generating a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. Based on the fact that the numerical value data is read (extracted) at the time of starting winning, a random number generation function is provided in which the numerical value data read becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Moreover, the detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the V winning switch 87a, the V determination winning switch 15a, and the V determination discharging switch 15b are used for game control. The input driver circuit 58 that supplies the microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the big hit variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 22 for opening and closing the V determination winning device 87 (movable part 872), and the V winning determination winning device 87 ( The solenoid 22 that opens and closes the area 870 movable portion 87, the solenoid 24 that opens and closes the V winning area 870 (opening and closing member), and the output circuit 59 that drives according to commands from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31. Has been done. The payout control board 37 controls the ball payout device 97 to control the payout of payout balls.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b that displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the normal symbol display device 10 that displays the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, the first special symbol reserved storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 is equipped with the effect control microcomputer 100, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the VDP 109, the I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

  The production control microcomputer 100, the production control command to instruct the production contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that passes the signal only in one direction from the main board 31 to the production control board 80. In addition to performing variable display control of the effect display device 9, display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side and display control of the V lamp 875 is performed via the lamp driver board 35, and a sound output board. Various performance controls are performed, such as controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 via 70.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122, from the trigger sensor 121 via the I / O port unit 105. input. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the I / O port unit 105. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation action of the technician to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the I / O port unit 105. Enter. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I / O port unit 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, types of random numbers, update ranges, uses, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random 1: A random counter for determining whether to make a big hit and whether to make a small hit. Random 1 is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit 65535, and then again and added from 0. (2) Random 2: Type of jackpot (type, symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot, symbol 4R hour / hour jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot, via jackpot 9 (8) R hour / hour jackpot, and via jackpot 5 (4) R time short and big hit either type) and a big hit symbol is determined (for big hit type determination, big hit symbol determination). (3) Random 3: The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 4: The variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 5: It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

  In this embodiment, as a big hit that is a specific game state, a symbol 15R time short big hit, a symbol 4R time short big hit, a small hit via 16 (15) R time short big hit, a small hit via 9 (8) R time short big hit, and a small hit It includes multiple types of via 5 (4) R hour / hour jackpot. Therefore, based on the value of the random number for random determination (random R), when it is determined to be a big hit, or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for determining big hit type (random 1) The jackpot type is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big hit via a small hit, the decided big hit becomes invalid unless a V winning is generated. Further, when the type of big hit is determined, at the same time, the big hit symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining big type (random 1). Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for jackpot symbol determination.

  In addition, when it is determined to be the type of small hit, the small hit symbol is also determined at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining small hit symbols.

  In addition, the variation pattern is first included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It decides on the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process. The fluctuation pattern type is a group of a plurality of fluctuation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the fluctuation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type without reach and a reach variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type with reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time saving state when the display result is out of order. When, the variation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving state is not set. For example, in the time saving state, in order to reduce the average time of the change time compared to the case where the time saving state is not set, the change time of the predetermined change pattern is set shorter than when it is not the time saving state, or the most change of the change pattern types. The variation pattern type with a short time is selected at a high rate, and even when the reach type is selected, the variation rate of the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time saving state is not set.

  In addition, such variation pattern types include a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs (for example, a variation pattern type in which an effect associated with the small hit is executed) and a small hit amount. Includes a change pattern type that cannot be selected (for example, a change pattern type in which an effect unrelated to the small hit is executed). Such a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, and includes a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect related to the small hit is executed. Therefore, when the variation pattern in which the predetermined suggestive effect regarding such a small hit is executed is executed, it is possible to raise the player's expectation. The variation pattern types that can be selected when it is a small hit can be selected both when it is a small hit and when it is not a small hit, and when it is a small hit it is better than when it is not a small hit. Is also set so that the selection rate becomes high. As a result, even if the variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs, it may occur when the small hit does not occur, so that the player can recognize in advance that the small hit will occur from the type of the variation pattern that is executed. You can prevent it from happening. On the other hand, the variation pattern types that cannot be selected when a small hit is, for example, a variation pattern in which an effect unrelated to the small hit is suggested, which suggests that the small hit is a big hit directly. By making the selection impossible when the small hit occurs, the relation between the effect of the variation pattern and the display result can be prevented from becoming complicated. It should be noted that the variation patterns that can be selected when a small hit occurs are set such that those set to a specific variation time are selected based on the correspondence with the opening control of the V determination winning device 87. . If such a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect relating to the small hit is executed can be executed when the small hit occurs, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the small hit at the time of the variable display. it can. Further, the player can easily deal with the game peculiar to the small hitting game state that it is necessary to enter the game ball into the V determination winning device 87 within a predetermined period in order to obtain the big hit. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to escape the advantageous state in which the game ball enters the V determination winning device 87.

  Further, the variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit occurs may not be limited to a specific variation time. In addition, the variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit occurs does not have to be the one in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed. Further, the variation patterns may be provided separately when the small hit occurs, when the small hit occurs, and when the big hit occurs. In addition, the variation pattern is not divided into a small hit, an out-of-range, and a big hit. The ranges may be the same.

  Further, instead of setting the variation pattern type and the variation pattern separately and determining the variation pattern by a two-stage lottery process, the variation pattern type is not provided and only the variation pattern determination random number is used to make a one-step The variation pattern may be determined by.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special drawing hit determination table, a second special drawing hit determination table, and various jackpot type judgment tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 54.

  FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure-based determination table. The first special drawing hit determination table is a data table for making a big hit judgment for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit judgment value to be compared with random 1 is set. The "probability" shown in FIG. 5 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  FIG. 5B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure hitting determination table. The second special drawing hit determination table is a data table for making a big hit judgment and a small hit judgment for the second special symbol, and a big hit judgment value to be compared with random 1 and a small hit judgment value are set. It is a table. The upper row in FIG. 5B is a big hit determination table section, and the lower row in FIG. 5B is a small hit determination table section. The “probability” shown in the upper part of FIG. 5B shows the probability (ratio) of a big hit, and the “probability” shown in the lower part of FIG. 5B shows the probability (ratio) of a small hit.

  When the CPU 56 detects a start winning (first starting winning) to the first starting winning opening 13 or a second winning winning (starting winning) to the second starting winning opening 14, a random number is generated at a predetermined timing. The count value (random R) of the circuit 503 is extracted. For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special figure hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the jackpot is given for the first special symbol. To decide. For the second start prize, compare the extracted value with the jackpot determination value set in the second special figure hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, make a jackpot for the second special symbol. To decide. When the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is compared with any of the small hit judgment values. When they match, it is decided to make a small hit for the second special symbol. Determining to make a small hit also means making a tentative decision to make a big hit via a small hit (it is described as a temporary decision because it is not controlled to a big hit unless V winnings occur during the small hit). .

  In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to make a transition to the big hit game state, the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to the big hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not to do it. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to shift to the small hit game state, whether the stop symbol by the variable display of the second special symbol to be a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

  It should be noted that the first special symbol is set not to be determined as a small hit, but the first special symbol may be set to be determined as a small hit with a predetermined probability.

  5 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5C is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 5 (D) is a second special figure jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

  In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), a numerical value that is compared with the value of random 1 for jackpot type determination, that is, "symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot" and "design 4R hour / hour jackpot" The jackpot determination value corresponding to each is set. In the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (D), a big hit determination value that is a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 1 and that corresponds to "Symbol 15R hour short big hit" is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 (C) and (D), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R short-time big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbol. The determination value corresponding to "15R short-time big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol.

  Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 is matched as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 is matched as the jackpot symbol. Determine the jackpot pattern that you made. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are determined at the same time.

  The small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (E) is a numerical value that is compared with the value of Random 2 for big hit type determination, and includes “small hit via 16 (15) R time-short big hit” and “small hit”. The jackpot determination values corresponding to each of the "via 9 (8) R hour / hour / big hit" and the "via 5 (4) R hour / hour / big hit" are set. However, the big hit type determined in the small hit via big hit type determination table is the first small hit (16 (15) R hour / hour big hit) and the second small hit (9 (8) R hour / hour big hit). , Is a temporary jackpot type associated with each of the third small jackpots (those that become 5 (4) R hourly short jackpots), and is invalid unless a V winning occurs in the small jackpot gaming state.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, the first time-saving state (fluctuation display 1 to 5 times) and the second time-saving state (fluctuation) are different in the number of fluctuation displays controlled in the time saving state (high base state). Due to the presence of a plurality of types of time-saving states such as 7 to 11 times of display), the game in the time-saving state is rich in variety and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  Next, the execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state which is controlled after the termination of the jackpot gaming state of various jackpots will be described. Here, the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit will be described as a typical example. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit, in a table format.

  After the big hit game state of 4R time saving big hit, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case of the first time saving state which is controlled to the time saving state over a relatively small number of fluctuation display times (1 to 5 times) Regarding the display, if the reserved memory of the first special symbol exists before the occurrence of the big hit game state, and if the reserved memory of the first special symbol does not exist before the occurrence of the big hit game state, As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the execution balance mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state is different.

  FIG. 6 (A) shows a variation display example of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is one reserved storage of the first special symbol at the time saving state control start. FIG. 6 (B) shows a variation display example of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is no reserved storage of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the big hit game state is controlled in the state where the first hold memory or the second hold memory is present, the hold memory existing before the control to the big hit game state is the big hit game. During the state, the memory state is continued and carried over until after the jackpot gaming state is finished, and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), at the beginning of the first time saving state after the end of the big hitting gaming state of 4R time saving big hit, of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory that existed before the control to the big hitting playing state. When there is a pending storage, since the starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 for variable display of the second special symbol to be preferentially executed is not yet done, in the time saving state, first, 1 As the variation display of the first time, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reserved storage of the first special symbol carried over from before the occurrence of the big hit game state is executed. In the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the 8R time saving big hit, a game is performed in which the game ball is entered into the gate 32 and the second starting winning opening 14 after the right hit is made, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6 (A). In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 can be executed.

  After the start of the time saving state, until the start winning a prize to the second start winning opening 14, when the reserved memory of the first special symbol exists, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory. Is executed. In FIG. 6 (A), after the start of the time saving state, until the start winning a prize to the second starting winning hole 14, one of the first special symbols that existed before the control to the big hit game state. The example in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed once based on the pending storage of is shown. In FIG. 6 (A), after the start of the time saving state, the second time after the start of the time saving state based on the fact that the variable display based on the start winning in the second start winning port 14 is executed once. An example in which the time saving control is ended is shown in the variable display.

  Regarding the starting winning a prize to the second starting winning a prize port 14, four pieces of stored memory information are possible as described above. Therefore, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 in the electric support state is executed after the start of the first time saving state and before the completion of one execution of the variable display based on the start winning on the second start winning opening 14. 6A, a maximum of four pieces of second reserved storage information can occur during the release control state of FIG. In this embodiment, in the case of the first time saving state, the variable display having a relatively long variable display time is based on the first start winning prize to the second start winning port 14 so that the second hold storage information is easily accumulated. Is executed. It should be noted that such a variable display in which the variable display time is rather long may not be executed.

  After that, when the second hold storage information is stored until the execution of one time of the variable display based on the start winning a prize to the second start winning a prize port 14 is finished, for example, the third time in FIG. 6 (A). ~ As shown in the variable display column of the second special symbol for the sixth time, the variable display based on the maximum 2 pieces of the second reserved memory information is executed, and the small hit lottery with the winning probability of about 1/7 is second reserved. Only the number of stored information items can be executed. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, it is possible to increase the player's expectation about the occurrence of a big hit via a small hit based on the second held storage information that occurred during the first time saving state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), at the start of the time saving state, when there is no hold storage of the first special symbol based on the hold storage existing before the control to the big hit game state, there is a 4R time short hit In a time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state is over, a right-handed hit is made to enter the game ball into the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball cannot enter the first starting winning opening 13. Since it is in the game state, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting winning opening 14 can be executed from the first varying display. In this case as well, as in the case of holding storage in FIG. 6A, a maximum of four pieces of second holding storage information as shown in FIG. 6B can occur. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, it is possible to increase the player's expectation about the occurrence of a big hit via a small hit based on the second held storage information that occurred during the first time saving state.

  The ending condition of the first time saving state after the big hit game state of the 4R time reduction big hit is, as described above, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, or of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is established when the variable display is executed five times in total.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), at the start of the time saving state, after the variable display of the first special symbol based on one reserved memory of the first special symbol that was present at the start was executed once, When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the second time, the variable display number of the second special symbol is executed once by executing the variable display of the second time, and thus the ending condition is When satisfied, the control of the first time saving state is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (B), at the start of the time saving state, when the reserved storage of the first special symbol does not exist at the start and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed from the first time, 1 In the variable display of the second time, the variable display count of the second special symbol is executed once, so that the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, and the control of the time saving state is ended.

  4R time-short big hit after the jackpot game state end condition of the first time-shortened state, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, or the total of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is set to hold when the number of times of execution is 5 times. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 6 (A), even if there is a reserved storage of the first special symbol at the start of the first time saving state, in the first time saving state, from the variable display of the first special symbol. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, is executed the same number of times (one time) as when the first special symbol is not stored on hold at the start of the first time saving state, so that the first time saving The condition ends.

  Further, for example, at the start of the first time-saving state, even if there is a maximum of four reserved memory of the first special symbol, in the first time-saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the four reserved memory. After being executed, the first time saving state ends by being executed the same number of times (one time) as when there is no reserved storage of the first special symbol at the start of the first time saving state.

  In this way, the ending condition of the first time saving state after the big hit game state of the 4R time reduction big hit, the variable display number of the second special symbol has been executed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol Since the total number of variable displays is set to be satisfied when it is executed five times, when the first special symbol at the start of the storage of the first special symbol, and when not, During the control period of 1 hour saving state, the number of executable times of the variable display of the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be the same number of times, so there is a difference in advantage and disadvantage for the player in the time saving state (high base state). This can be prevented and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 6, etc., the ending condition of the first time saving state defined by the total variation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number of times that the variation display by the first reserved memory is performed. (4 times) and the predetermined number of times the predetermined variable display is executed for the second special symbol is set to the total number of times (1 time), so in the first shortened state, fluctuation due to the first reserved memory. Even if the display is performed a certain number of times, it is possible to prevent a difference from being advantageous and disadvantageous to the player due to the first hold storage information, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  For types of big hits other than the symbol 4R hour / hour jackpot, the minimum fluctuation display number "1" in the hour / short state in the above-mentioned symbol 4R hour / hour / big hit is replaced by "7", and the maximum in the hour / short state in the symbol 4R hour / hour / big hit. The variable display count "5" is replaced with "11". Therefore, even in the big hit type other than the symbol 4R time-short and big hit, as with the case of the 8R time short-and-big hit, the presence or absence of the reserved memory number of the first special symbol at the start of the first time-short state after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time And regardless of the number, the second time saving state continues until the same variable display of the second special symbol is performed 7 times. As a result, for jackpot types other than the symbol 4R time / short and big hit, the same effects as those obtained for the symbol 4R time / short / large hit can be obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 6, when the number of time saving (electric support) after the big hit is set to a relatively small number, as described above, the player is determined by the number of the first hold storage information immediately after the end of the big hit game state. It is preferable that the number of times of shortening of time (electricity support) that would be disadvantageous to is not set.

  7 and 8 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. 7 and 8 show the relationship between specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the designated content of the command. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state.

  Main commands in FIGS. 7 and 8 will be described. Command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). When a unique number is given to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the effect display device.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designating commands indicating a display result including a misalignment display result, a big hit type, a big hit display result for each small hit type, and a small hit display result.

  Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol fixed designation command that designates to end the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols.

  Commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the big hit game state for each big hit type.

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command which indicates that the special winning opening is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command after opening the special winning opening, which indicates after (closed) opening of the special winning opening of the number (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands that designate the end of the big hit game state for each type of big hit.

  The command A 401 (H) is a first start winning a prize specifying command that specifies that the first starting award has been won. The command A402 (H) is a second start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the second starting award has been won.

  The command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). The command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

  The command C0XX (H) is a first reserved storage number designating command for designating the first reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second reserved storage number designating command for designating the second reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a reserved storage number designation command for designating the reserved storage number after subtraction when the reserved storage number is subtracted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first number of reserved storages and the second number of reserved storages, a reserved storage number subtraction designation command designating subtraction of the number of reserved storages by 1 may be used.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are a result of winning determination such as a big hit determination, a big hit type determination, a variation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is a production control command indicating the contents. Among them, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command showing whether or not a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and a judgment result of a type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result. Is.

  The command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. The command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. The command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. The command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. The command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. The command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. The command C601 (H) is a V winning designation command that designates that there is a V winning. The command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) to the V determination winning device 87 is detected.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 is provided with a first hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer has a jackpot determination random number (random R) which is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and , A random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) is stored.

  Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 55 is provided with a second reserved memory buffer for storing the reserved memory information of the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a big hit determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and , A random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) is stored.

  Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13, the CPU 56 extracts random number values from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Execute the process of saving (storing). Specifically, these random number values are extracted and stored (stored) in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts random number values from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the second reserved storage buffer. Execute the process of saving (storing) in the area. Specifically, these random number values are extracted and stored (stored) in the second reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14.

  In this way, the storage of the information regarding the starting winning as described above in the storage buffer may be referred to as "stored". It should be noted that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted at the time of the start winning and stored in the reserved storage buffer in advance, but a variation pattern setting process described later. You may make it extract at the time of the change start of a special symbol.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) to execute the timer interrupt process. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), display random number updating processing (variation pattern) Type determination, update processing of various random numbers such as variation pattern determination), and random number update processing for initial value (normal value update processing of initial value of random number generation counter for determination per symbol) and the like are executed.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power interruption detection process for detecting whether a power interruption signal is output (whether it is in an ON state or not) is executed (S20). Next, via the input driver circuit 58, the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V winning switch 87a, the V determination winning switch 15a, and the V determination ejection. The detection signal of the switch 15b is input and the state determination is performed (switch processing: S21).

  Next, the CPU 56, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b, the normal symbol display device 10, the first special symbol reserve memory display device 18a, the second special symbol reserve memory display device 18b, the normal symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (S22). About the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the normal symbol display device 10, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display device in accordance with the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination and a small number for determining small hit type used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23 ). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order, perform the corresponding process, and the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 10 in a predetermined order, and the value of the normal symbol process flag is in the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 100 (production control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, starting information, probability variation information and the like supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

  In addition, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a and the prize winning switch 25a (S30).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing a normal symbol effect display according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data ( S33). In addition, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby performing the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 10.

  After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the starting port switch passage process is executed (S311). Then, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores the pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as the big hit determination random number obtained based on the starting winning into the first starting winning opening 13, as described above. A first reserved storage buffer, and a second reserved storage buffer that stores reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on a winning start to the second starting winning opening 14 Is provided. In each of these pending storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the number of storages in each pending storage (4 for the first pending storage data and 4 for the second pending storage data) is secured.

  In the starting opening switch passing process, if the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is provided on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination are obtained from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Random numbers) are extracted and stored (stored) in the storage area of the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, if the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on, the number of stored second reserved storage data is counted on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1, and numeric data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) are extracted from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, a process of saving (storing) them in the saving area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed.

  In the following description regarding the reserved storage, the storage of the above-described information regarding the starting winning in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as “reserved storage”. The numerical data stored in the first pending storage buffer may be referred to as first pending storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second pending storage buffer may be referred to as second pending storage information. As I did.

The processing of S300 to S307 is the following processing.
The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a small hit, and determining a small hit type in the case of a small hit. The fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) is a process of determining the fluctuation pattern and controlling the fluctuation time timer to start counting.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for controlling the production control microcomputer 100 to transmit the display result designation command. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process after the change time of the change pattern selected in the change pattern setting process has elapsed. Special symbol stop processing (S304), the variation display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is timed by the variation time timer It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is a processing for performing control for opening the special winning opening in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 when the big hit game state is entered. In the special winning opening opening process (S306), the control for transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, the process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. Processing. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still no remaining rounds, the big hit ending process is performed. The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the big hit game state.

  The small hit opening pre-processing (S308) is a processing for performing control for opening the working opening in the V determination winning device 87 when the small hit game state is entered. The small hitting open process (S309) is a process of confirming whether or not a game ball has won V in the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87, and transmitting a V winning designation command when the player has won V. Is a process of performing a process such as a process of transmitting a small hit end designation command at the end timing of the small hit.

  The small hit completion process (S310) is a process for shifting to a big hit game state when a game ball has won V in the V winning area 870 in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 (transmission of a big hit start designation command, big hit display). (Time setting, jackpot opening mode setting, process flag transition setting of jackpot opening pre-processing, etc.) is performed, and when the V winning is not made, the jackpot game state is not changed and a special It is a process for executing a process for shifting to the symbol normal process (S300).

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passage processing of S312. In the starting opening switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first starting opening switch 13a is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting opening switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting opening switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage for counting the first reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1221.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 extracts the values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area of the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, It is stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect production process of previously determining a variation display result and a variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected first special symbol based on the starting winning is subsequently executed (S1215).

  In this embodiment, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as pending storage information, and then the variable display is started. When the condition is established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S300), based on the pending storage information, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to start the variable display, the variation The determination as to whether or not the display result is the big hit display result and the big hit type are determined based on the big hit determination value and the big hit type determination value set corresponding to the various random number values described above. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including the determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S301) is performed using the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random number values described above. Based on.

  On the other hand, separately from such a determination, the timing before the variable display based on the starting winning prize in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is started, specifically, the game ball is first started. At the timing (timing at which the hold storage information is stored) when the start winning is made in the winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, the holding storage information storing various data obtained at the start winning is pre-read, and the pre-read hold Based on the stored information, it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit, a small hit, a big hit type, and a variation pattern type in correspondence with the various random number values described above. Based on the set jackpot determination value, jackpot type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value, pre-reading determination winning effect processing is executed. By doing so, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the variable display result is predicted in advance before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of winning the start, the effect symbol is changed. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect such as a pre-reading notice that gives a notice of a big hit (possibly a big hit) during variable display.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (S1216), and also transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1217). Further, the CPU 56 controls to send the first start winning award designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218), and sets the value of the first reserve storage number counter to the EXT data to designate the first reserve storage number. Control is performed to send a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1219).

  By executing the processing of S1216, S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, gaming state such as jackpot game state) Every time the winning a prize is entered into the starting winning opening 13, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 occurs, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designating command. And, a set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second starting port switch 14a is in the on state (S1221). If the second starting port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process is ended as it is. If the second starting opening switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S1222). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 extracts the values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area of the second storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, the big hit determination random number (random 1), the big hit type determination random number (random 2), the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 4) are extracted, It is stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes the same winning-time effect processing as the winning-time effect processing as described in S1215 for the detected starting prize of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 56 performs a control of transmitting a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (S1226), and a control of transmitting the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is performed (S1227). Further, the CPU 56 controls to send the second start winning award designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228), sets the value of the second reserved storage number counter in the EXT data, and designates the second reserved storage number. Control for transmitting a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1229).

  By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, gaming state such as jackpot game state) Every time a winning a prize is given to the starting winning opening 14, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, a symbol designating command, a variation type command, a second starting winning designating command. And, a set of four commands of the second reserved storage number designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

  If there is no reserved storage data in the reserved storage buffer in S51, the process for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command (S80) is performed, and then the process ends. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 confirms whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

  In this embodiment, hereinafter, depending on whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set to the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 8a. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is performed. Be done. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set to the special symbol pointer, based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. Is performed.

  By the control of S52 to S54, if there is even one data of the second reserved memory in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 8b based on the data of the second reserved memory, It is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 8a based on the data of the first reserved memory.

  Next, in the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages indicated by the special symbol pointer = 1 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, the CPU 56, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

  That is, the CPU 56, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. Further, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this.

  In addition, CPU56, on the basis of the value of the reserved storage number counter of the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs the control to send the reserved storage number designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100. (S59). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first reserved storage number designation command. When the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to send the second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed for the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first special symbol indicating that the process is executed for "first" Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 1 (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 performs the big hit determination by reading the big hit determination random number extracted in S1214 of the start opening switch passage processing or S1224 of the start opening switch passage processing and stored in the hold storage buffer or the random number buffer. The big hit judging module compares a predetermined big hit judging value (see FIG. 5) or a small hit judging value (see FIG. 5) with a big hit judging random number, and if they match, decides to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program that executes the process of determining. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process and a small hit determination process.

  In the process of the big hit determination, if the first special symbol matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5 (A), the second special symbol matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5 (B) Then, it is decided to be a big hit for the special symbol. When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in S60), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to be a big hit, it is to determine whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, it is also to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbol display device is a big hit symbol .

  When it is decided to make a big hit in S61 (Y of S61), a big hit flag showing that it is a big hit is set (S71).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is “first”, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5C is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (indicates "second"), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5D is selected (S74), S75. Proceed to.

  In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. The determination is made (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

  Further, if the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any big hit determination value in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (which is a variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5 (B) Is used to determine which of the small hit determination values the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches, thereby performing the small hit determination processing (S76). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 5B (Y in S76), it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating a small hit is set (S78).

  After setting the small hit flag, the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (E) is selected (S79), and the value matches the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area. The type of big hit corresponding to the value is determined as the type of big hit via big hit (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hitting determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the small hitting determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82 described later.

  In S81, the data indicating the type of big hit determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the big hit type is "symbol 15R hour short big hit", "01" is set in the big hit type buffer as data showing the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "symbol 4R hour short big hit", the data showing the big hit type As a result, "02" is set in the big hit type buffer. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "16 (15) R hourly short big hit through small hit", "03" is set in a temporary big hit type buffer different from the big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is a small win via 9 (8) R short time big hit, "04" is set in the temporary big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type. When the type of big hit is 5 (4) R short-time big hit through big hit, "05" is set in the temporary big hit type buffer as data showing the big hit type. Of these, data showing 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R hour / hour jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4) R hour / hour jackpot via small hit are V winnings in the small hit game state. If it does not occur, there is data that is not valid without a big hit and is provisionally set.

  In S82, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is a falling symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hitting flag is set, one of the small hitting symbols “1”, “5”, and “9” which is the small hitting symbol corresponding to the small hitting type selected and determined in S80 is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. To do. If the big hit flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a big hit design according to the big hit type selected and determined in S75, is determined as a stop design of the special design. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S79).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process process.

  In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b. The control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer is When it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is ended. Further, the symbol confirmation designation command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, such as when it is determined to be the symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot or the symbol 4R hour / hour jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the hour / hour flag, which is a flag set when controlled to the hour / hour state. When it is set, the time saving flag is reset (S134), and either the big hit start 1 designation command or the big hit start 2 designation command is given to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the determined big hit type. Processing for transmitting the command (major jack start designation command) (S135).

  As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of big hit is the symbol 4R hourly short big hit, the big hit start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the type of big hit is the symbol 15R hourly big hit, the big hit start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the jackpot type corresponds to is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time at which the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set to the special winning opening control timer (S136). After that, in the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the special winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the special winning opening is opened and the round is started.

  Further, according to the jackpot type specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55, the opening pattern data for each jackpot type stored in the ROM 54 described above is referred to, and the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times). , Or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), and other data indicating the opening mode are set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Of such data, the release count data is set in the release count counter for counting the release count. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (S305) (S138), and the processing is ended. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special winning opening opening pre-processing.

  Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the small hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of times of opening including the setting of the small hit opening control timer used for the small hit opening control (for example, (10 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time between opening are set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening pretreatment.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state of the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set (S142). If the time saving flag is not set in S142, it means that the time saving state is not set, and thus the process proceeds to S152 which will be described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, since it is a time saving state, for counting the total value of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The total time reduction counter as a counting unit is updated by subtracting -1 (S143).

  In the big hit end process of FIG. 14, the total time saving counter that is subtracted and updated in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time saving state after the 4R symbol time saving big hit, and is of a type other than the 4R symbol time saving big hit. When it is controlled to the second time saving state after the big hit, it is set to 11 times in S168, and in S143, the variable display which is the outlier display result is subtracted and updated each time it is executed. The total time saving counter is used for both the determination of whether the ending condition of the first saving time condition is satisfied and the determination of whether the ending condition of the second saving time condition is satisfied.

  Next, based on checking whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end time of the variable display of the second special symbol (S145). In S145, when it is the end time of the variable display of the first special symbol, not the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, in S145, when it is the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by subtracting -1 (S146). The special figure 2 hour / hour counter that is subtracted and updated in S146 is a counting means for counting the variation display number of the second special symbol when it is controlled to the first hour / hour state or the second hour / hour state after the big hit game is over. In the jackpot ending process of FIG. 14, the special figure 2 time saving counter is set to 5 times by S165 when being controlled to the first time saving state and is set to 11 times by S168 when being controlled to the second time saving state. To be done. The special figure 2 hour reduction counter is subtracted and updated by S146 each time the variable display that is the display result of the second special symbol is lost is executed.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour count counter becomes "0", one of the ending conditions of the first hour / hour state is satisfied, or one of the ending conditions of the second hour / hour state is satisfied. Since it is time, the process proceeds to S149, which will be described later, in order to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state that is being executed. On the other hand, in S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour count counter is not “0”, it is to confirm whether or not another one of the ending conditions of the first hour / hour state is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to S148.

  In S148, based on the total variable display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state, in order to confirm whether the ending condition of the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed is satisfied First, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter updated and subtracted in S143 has become "0" (S148). In S148, when the count value of the total time saving counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S152 described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total hour / hour counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S149.

  S149, S150, in each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, when it is determined by S147 that the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached the number of end conditions, and by S148, the first special symbol and At any time, when it is determined that the total variable display number of the second special symbols has reached the number of end conditions, it is executed to end the first time saving state or second time saving state that is being executed. .

  In S149, the set time saving flag is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set hour / hour counter is reset (S150). Then, in response to the completion of the time saving condition based on the number of times of variable display in the time saving state, a process for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151), and the process proceeds to S152.

  In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal process.

  In such a special symbol stop process, by S142 to S151, when the first time saving state, the execution of the one-time variation display of the second special symbol and the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 When any one of the execution of the out-of-range variation display is satisfied, the process of ending the first time saving state is performed. Further, by S142 to S151, when in the second time saving state, the execution of the out-of-range variation display of the second special symbol 7 times, and the total of 11 out-of-range variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed. When either of the above is established, the process of ending the second time saving state is performed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process in the special symbol process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the special winning opening control timer set before the big hit ending process is executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit ending time has elapsed (S162). If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of the jackpot to be ended is the 8R hour / short jackpot, based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 in the current jackpot gaming state ( S163).

  When the type of the big hit that ends in S163 is the symbol 4R time-saving big hit, in order to control to the first time-saving state, as a termination condition of the first time-saving state, the special figure 2 time-saving number counter is set to "1" (second special The data of the variable display 1 time of the symbol) is set (S164), and the data of "5" (corresponding to the total variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 times) is set in the total hour reduction counter (S165). ). Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

  When the type of jackpot that ends in S163 is not the symbol 4R time / short jackpot, it is when the type of jackpot to be finished is a jackpot type other than the symbol 4R time / short jackpot, and in order to control to the second hour / short state, the second hour / short state As a termination condition of, the data of "7" (corresponding to one variation display of the second special symbol) is set in the special figure 2 hour / hour counter (S167), and "11" is set in the total hour / hour counter (first special symbol and The data of the total variation display 11 times of the second special symbol is set (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

  In S170, the time saving flag is set in order to control the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S170). When controlling to the first time saving state, the first time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second time saving state, the second time saving flag is set. Then, depending on the end of the big hit game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S171), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal process.

  Thereby, after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time short and big hit is controlled to the first time short state, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit type other than the symbol 4R time short big hit is controlled to the second time short state. Then, the respective end conditions of the first time saving state and the second time saving state are individually defined by the number of times of fluctuation display only of the second special symbol and the total number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It

  In such a jackpot end process, by S164, S165, after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time short jackpot, the execution of the one-off variation display of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol Is set to control to the first time saving state until any one of the execution of the deviation change display of 5 times is satisfied. Further, by S167, S168, after the big hit game state of the big hit type other than the symbol 4R hour short big hit, the execution of the deviation display of 7 times of the second special symbol and the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 11 The setting for controlling to the second time saving state is set until either one of execution of the out-of-range variation display is established.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S308). In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 22 to move the movable portion 872 to the open state based on the opening mode of the small hit set in S140 of FIG. 13, thereby operating the V determination winning device 87. The mouth opening operation is started (S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command indicating that the small hit game state is started to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S412). Next, the CPU 56 sets a V determination winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the winning number in the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small hit as a condition for ending the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V determination winning number counter is set to "10" and the setting for down counting the V winning number is made. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting open process (S309) (S413).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the small hitting open process (S309) in the special symbol process process. In the processing for opening the small hit, the CPU 56 updates the small hit opening control timer by -1 (S430). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V determination winning number counter that counts the number of V winnings is "0" in S435 described later (S431). The V determination winning number counter is set to “10” in S413 of FIG. 15, and the count value becomes “0” when 10 V winning balls are counted. When the count value of the V determination winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V determination winning number counter is not “0” in S430, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit opening control timer set in S140 of FIG. 13 has timed out (timer value = 0). Yes (S432).

  If the small hit opening control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, if the small hit opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled according to the time value of the small hit opening control timer based on the small hit opening mode set in S140 of FIG. Then, the movable part 872 is operated to the open state, and the processing for opening and closing the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 is performed (S433).

  Next, in order to determine whether or not a V prize generated by a game ball entering the V prize area 870 that is in an open state inside the V determination prize winning device 87 from the V prize opening is detected, It is determined whether the switch 87a is in the on state (S434). The ON state in S434 is when the V winning is detected, and the V winning flag which is set when the V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, processing for transmitting the V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball has been detected, and can recognize the V winning number. Next, the opening / closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first one of the game balls that has entered the V determination winning device 87 wins the V prize, the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game that enters the V determination winning device 87. All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V determination winning switch 15b.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the ON state in S434, it means that the V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15b is in the ON state (S438). If it is in the on state in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and if it is not in the on state in S438, the process ends.

  In S439, the count value of the V determination winning number counter set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 15 is down-counted by "-1" (S439), and the process for transmitting the V determination winning ball detection designation command is performed. (S440). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected. It is possible to recognize the number of played game balls.

  When the count value of the V determination winning number counter is “0” in S431, it means that the small winning V winning number has reached the upper limit value, and thus the opening ending condition for the small hit is satisfied. When the small hit opening control timer times out in S432, it means that the small hit opening end condition is satisfied due to the end of the small hit opening control. At these times, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in the closed state, and closes the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V determination prize number counter is “0”, even if the V determination prize device 87 according to the opening mode of the small hit is being opened, the count value of the V determination prize number counter is determined according to the count value. The V determination winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit opening control timer times out, the V determination winning device 87 is closed in response to the end of the small hit opening control in the small hit opening mode.

  Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning effective period after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning effective period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process ( The value is updated to the value corresponding to S310 (S443), and the process ends. As a result, timing of a specific period, which is the V winning effective period after the V determination winning device 87 is closed, is started. Since the specific period which is the V winning effective period is set in this way, even when the game ball passes through the V winning region later than the time when the game ball normally passes some time, the game ball Can be detected. Further, since the specific period is set, even if someone illegally tries to win the V winning area, only the period is detected, so that fraud can be prevented.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the small hitting end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit completion post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning effective period timer by -1 (S441), and confirms whether the V winning effective period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

  When the V winning effective period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is determined in order to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. It is determined whether or not is on (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, the V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and the V winning flag indicating that the V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, the processing for transmitting the V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the processing is ended. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

  When the V winning effective period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening / closing member to return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big hit, and the big hit flag is set (S449).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hitting game state, if the player makes a right hit in accordance with a right hit promotion notification described later, the game ball will enter the V determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. Based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 always wins the V prize in the V winning area 870, the V winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the big hit flag is set in S449, and the big hit game state is controlled.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines that the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer in S81 is legally a big hit due to the occurrence of the V winning, and the data is changed to the big hit type buffer. Officially memorize (S450). Then, the hour-shortening flags (the first hour-shortening flag and the second hour-shortening flag that are set in the big hit ending process of FIG. 14) set at that time are temporarily reset (S451).

  Next, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the big hit gaming state starts. Next, the special winning opening control timer is set to a value corresponding to a big hit display time (a time at which, for example, the effect display device 9 notifies that a big hit has occurred) (S453).

  In addition, referring to the big hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval depending on the kind of big hit. The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as time (closed winning opening between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the release count data is set in the release count counter for counting the release count in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (S305) (S455), and the processing is ended. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state, the game goes to the big hitting game state.

  If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big hit game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when the V winning is not generated in the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state is not shifted.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). For example, in the command analysis process, when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the command data is stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103. Further, in the command analysis process, when the display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103. In addition, when various effect control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command has been received is set. Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process processing, in order to perform various effects such as effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the content of the effect control command analyzed in S704, among the processes corresponding to the control state, A process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected to execute production control.

  Next, a random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers such as random numbers for selecting and selecting various effect contents is executed (S706). Then, it transfers to S702.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and when the variation display time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed, or the symbol confirmation designation command is received. When this is done, the variable display of the effect design is stopped. By performing such effect control main processing, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the effect display device 9, which are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and are received. By controlling the effect devices such as the speaker 27, various effect controls according to the game state are performed.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the variable display of the effect symbol is started, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped. Good. The fluctuation pattern command is a command composed of data capable of specifying the length of fluctuation time and the information necessary for designating the fluctuation display mode such as the fluctuation display result. The fluctuation display is controlled to be executed at the fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern command. In addition, the stop symbol when performing the effect control for variably displaying the effect symbol is determined based on a determination as to whether the symbol is a miss or a big hit based on the display result designation command.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, after performing the processes of S500 and S501, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. The following processes are executed in each process.

  In the production control process processing, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled, and the production corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed, but is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol. Both the control related to the effect and the control related to the effect synchronized with the change of the second special symbol are executed in one effect control process process. Further, in the effect control process processing, effects corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (synchronized) are also executed in a manner that can be displayed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol.

  Hitting ball promotion effect processing (S500): Based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, the game state is confirmed and a hitting ball promotion effect according to the game state is executed. The hit ball promotion effect is an effect for giving a notification for promoting the hitting of the game ball to at least one of the first route (left hitting route) and the second route (right hitting route) in the game area 7. Specifically, the hit ball promotion effect includes a right hit promotion notification effect that notifies that the game ball is hit into the second path (right hitting path), but the hit ball promotion effect includes the right hit promotion. You may make it include the notification production | generation and the production | generation of the left-handing promotion notification which gives the notification which accelerate | stimulates the driving | running of the game ball to a 1st route | route (left-handed route).

  For example, in the specific display area of the effect display device, the right-handing promotion notification continuously displays a character image such as "right-handing" that suggests right-handing and promotes it together with a right-pointing arrow image. It is done by doing.

  In this embodiment, left hitting is basically used as the hitting of the game ball, and based on the state where the left hitting promotion notification is not executed but the right hitting promotion notification is executed as the hit ball promotion effect, the second route (right Based on the state that the driving of the game ball to the hit route (right hit) is promoted, and conversely, the right hit promotion notification is not executed, the hit of the game ball to the first route (left hit route) (left) An example of effect control for promoting hitting will be described.

  As the hit ball promotion effect, effect control may be performed in which both left hit promotion notification and right hit promotion notification are used in accordance with the game state. Further, as the hit ball promotion effect, effect control may be performed in which both left hit promotion notification and right hit promotion notification are used according to the game state.

  Prefetching process (S501): This is a process of storing pending storage information (holding information) corresponding to the pending storage information of the game control microcomputer 560, and making the pending storage information available for prefetching effect. The prefetch effect is the content of the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved information by prefetching the reserved memory information before the order of the variable display (symbol fluctuation) of the special symbol based on the reserved memory information comes. It is a production technique that judges, and gives a notice in advance of how the variable display of special symbols in the future will be. For example, when the held storage information indicates that a small hit or a big hit for the symbol, a notice effect called a held consecutive notification effect (see FIG. 21) can be executed as the prefetch effect. Hereinafter, the pending storage information targeted for the prefetching effect is referred to as “target pending storage information”. Further, the hold display based on the hold information which is the target of the prefetching effect is referred to as "target hold display".

  Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect production start process (S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (S801): control is performed so that the variation time production, which is the production corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, is started. In response to the received variation pattern command, an effect pattern of the variation time effect is selected, and the time of the effect time timer that measures the effect time to be executed is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect during change (S802).

  Processing during production symbol fluctuation (S802): While controlling the switching timing of each state forming the production pattern, etc., it is monitored whether or not the production time counted by the production time timer has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the variable time effect stop processing (S803) in order to end the variable time effect based on the end of the effect time or the reception of the symbol fixing designation command. Update to the value.

  Effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803): When changing, stop the effect, and perform control to display the effect result corresponding to the variable display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display processing (S804): When a big hit (first big hit or second big hit) occurs, control for performing fanfare expression as an effect such as big hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Perform display control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): display control is performed during a big hit round. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending process (S807).

  Post-Round Processing (S806): Display control between rounds of big hits is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Small hit display process (S808): When a small hit occurs, fanfare effect as an effect such as a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the small hit is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Performs display control such as control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hitting open process (S809).

  Small hitting open process (S809): In the small hit, various effect controls are performed while the V determination winning device 87 is open. Then, when the V determination winning device 87 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect processing (S810).

  Small hit end effect processing (S810): The effect display device 9 performs effect control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. In addition, in the small hitting game state, when the V winning of the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a and it is determined that the V winning has occurred, the V winning effect control for notifying that the V winning has occurred is performed. When a V winning occurs in the small hit game state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) in order to shift to the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the V winnings are not generated in the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state is not moved, so that the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  In the production control process processing, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled by the above-described processing, the production at the time of variation corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the production result corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol is obtained. Is displayed. The effect control CPU 101, for example, recognizes the specified variation pattern and the display result for the variation display to be executed based on the received variation pattern command and the display result designation command, and produces the variation time effect. Determine the result. Further, in the effect control process process, in S500, the execution status of the effect control process is confirmed, and the hit ball promotion effect is executed according to the game control state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute a plurality of types of ball-hit promotion effects including a high base state right-hit promotion notification, a small hit right-hit promotion notification, and a large-hit right-hit promotion notification as the ball hit promotion effects. The high base state right hit promotion notification is a hit ball promotion effect for making a right hit in the high base state and aiming the game ball to enter the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning port 14). is there. The small hit right hit promotion notification is a hit ball promotion effect for aiming the game ball to enter the V determination prize device 87 (V prize area) by making a right hit in the small hit game state. The big hit right hit promotion notification is a hit ball promotion effect for aiming the game ball to enter the big hit variable winning ball device 20 (big prize opening) in the big hit game state.

  High base state Right hit promotion notification, small hit right hit promotion notification, and big hit right hit promotion notification include a character image such as "right hit" that suggests right hit and promotes with a right arrow image. You may perform using the same image displayed continuously. That is, even if the right-handed promotion notification is in a state in which it is not possible to specify which one of the promotion notification in the high base state, the promotion notification in the small hit, and the promotion notification in the big hit can be displayed in an unspecified state. Good. The right-handing promotion notification is an image that continuously displays a character image such as "right-handing" that promotes right-handing together with an arrow image pointing to the right. May be displayed using a different image, such as a yellow image for the small hit right hit promotion notification, and a red image for the big hit right hit promotion notification. In this embodiment, an example in which the high base state right hitting promotion notification is displayed in a blue image, the small hit right hitting promotion notification is displayed in a yellow image, and the big hit right hitting promotion notification is displayed in a red image Will be explained. Further, the size of the image used for the effect may be changed according to the type of hitting ball promotion effect. For example, the size of the image used for the effect may be different depending on the degree of advantage for the player. As an example, a small image is used for small hit right-handing promotion notification, a small base image is used for high-base state right-handing promotion notification, and a medium-sized image is used for high-base right-handing promotion notification, and a large hit is right-handing promotion notification. You may make it notify by using the image of. As for the high base state right-handing promotion notification, a large-sized image may be used to give the promotion notification as in the case of the big hit right-handing promotion notification.

  Next, as an example of the effect in the big hit game state displayed on the effect display device 9 when the "symbol big hit" or "big hit via small hit" is obtained based on the winning in the second start winning opening 14, The V combo effect (VCOMBO effect) will be described. V combo production, when it becomes "symbol big hit" or "big hit via small hit" based on the winning in the second start winning opening 14, during a predetermined period between predetermined rounds during the big hit gaming state , Is an effect of notifying the number of payouts of a prize ball (outgoing ball) in a jackpot gaming state in a predetermined stage, and is an effect of mainly notifying a payout number of prize balls in a plurality of times in stages.

  FIG. 20 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of the round suggestion effect. In FIG. 20, an example of the round suggestive effect is shown according to the elapse of time, and images having little relation to the round suggestive effect are omitted. The round suggestion effect is a round in the big hit game state which is executed through the end of the small hit by the display image of the effect display device 9 when it is determined that the big hit is generated due to the occurrence of the V prize in the small hit game state. It is a production that suggests a number.

  20A to 20E show an example of a round suggestive effect. In the small hitting game state, the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to an open state, and the game ball can enter the V determination winning device 87. When a V winning is generated in such a state, a V-shaped V winning image 94 is displayed on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. As a result, a V-winning notification indicating that a winning has occurred is given. The display of the V winning image 94 is continued until the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to be in the closed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, when the V winning image 94 is displayed according to the occurrence of the V winning, the aura image 95 (95A to 95E) imitating the aura is the V winning. The image is displayed in a display mode like an effect image clinging to the periphery of the image 94. As shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (E), the aura image is composed of a plurality of colors of an aura image white 95A, an aura image blue 95B, an aura image green 95C, an aura image red 95D, or an aura image rainbow 95E. It is displayed in the selected color. In the drawing, the color of the aura image 95 is shown by the color letters in parentheses (the color letters are not actually displayed, but may be displayed). As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the color of the aura image 95 can be changed and displayed in a predetermined plurality of stages such as white → blue → green → red → rainbow during the small hitting game. Such a color of the aura image 95 is produced such that the color can be changed step by step according to the number of winning prizes to the V determination winning device 87.

  The color of the aura image 95 may or may not change in the color initially displayed during the small hitting game. The aura image 95 can suggest the degree of expectation of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. The correspondence relationship of “white <blue <green <red <rainbow” is predetermined as the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of a large number of rounds. As a result, the player can recognize the expectation of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by the color of the aura image 95. For example, the player can recognize that the number of rounds is greater when the aura image red 95D is displayed than when the aura image blue 95B is displayed.

  By executing the round number suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 20, the V winning aura image 95 is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 after the game medium has entered the specific region. Since the production mode of a predetermined production such as production is changed, the interest of the game can be improved by the production without the progress of the game being delayed.

  In addition, since the number-of-rounds suggesting effect by the V winning aura image 95 is executed in association with the effect of notifying the V winning by displaying the V winning image 94, the interest of the game is further improved by the effect. be able to.

  In addition, since the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting effect by the V winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87, the round number suggesting effect and V The player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have entered the determination winning device 87.

  In addition, the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting production by the V winning aura image 95 is controlled based on the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state (advantage of the number of rounds) which is controlled based on the V winning in the small hitting gaming state. Since the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big hit, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game through the production.

  FIG. 21 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of the continuous holding notification effect. FIG. 22 is a timing chart of the suspended consecutive notification effect. With reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a hold consecutive notification effect as a special effect will be described. In FIG. 21, (A) to (D) show an example of the continuous holding notification effect according to the passage of time. In FIG. 22, the production control timing is shown for the period from the start of the small hitting game state to the beginning of the big hitting game state based on the V winnings.

  In the pending storage, there is pending storage information that will be a big hit in the future in the pending storage information that exists when the big hit occurs, and it exists before the big hit occurs after the big hit game state of the big hit ends. The next big hit occurs within the range of the pending storage information, and the next big hit continuously occurs within the range of the pending storage information that existed when the big hit occurred. It is a big hit (holding villa). Since the small hit is a big hit via a small hit based on the occurrence of a V winning, the held storage information for the small hit is the held storage information for a big hit in the future.

  In the holding sequence in this embodiment, the inside of the holding storage information of the second holding storage information at the time of a big hit in the time saving state (high base state) is determined. When the second reserved storage information is present, the second reserved storage information is used for the variable display with priority over the first reserved storage information. Therefore, in the time saving state (high base state), the reserved storage information of the second reserved storage information. If there is a small hit or a pattern big hit pending storage information, continuous big hits can occur, so these pending storage information are judged to be the storage information of the pending series.

  After the small hitting game state is started as shown in FIG. 22, if a V winning occurs during execution of the process during open processing (S809) of FIG. 19, as shown in FIG. 21 (A) and FIG. On the effect display device 9, the V-shaped V winning image 94 is displayed for a relatively short predetermined period. As a result, the V winning notification indicating that the V winning has occurred is given. When the suspension consecutive effects are executed, the following effects are executed over the small hit game state and the big hit game state.

  When a predetermined time elapses after the occurrence of the V winning in the small hitting game state, the entire screen of the effect display device 9 changes to black (dark) and nothing is displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (B) and FIG. The blackout display that does not look like is displayed as a basic effect by the open processing (S809) and the small hit end processing (S810) of FIG. Instead of the effect, it is continuously executed until the end of the small hitting game state (first process of the holding continuous notification effect). The blackout display may be a difficult-to-visualize effect that changes the visibility of a predetermined image to a difficult-to-recognize state that is lower than the reference state, or an effect to surprise the player. For example, the entire display screen is black. Instead of darkening to a single color image, a predetermined color image such as translucent black is overlaid on the front side of the normally displayed effect image (effect image such as effect pattern, character, and background image) By doing so, an effect of lowering the brightness of the image on the entire display screen to darken the image as a whole or an effect of giving a special feeling to the player may be performed.

  Then, after the end of the small hit game state, by the big hit display process (S804) of FIG. 19, a fanfare effect at the start of a big hit that is executed as a basic effect (a big hit start notification is a broken line in the figure. 21) instead of the above), the continuous holding notification as shown in FIG. 21 (C) or (D) and FIG. 22 is executed (second processing of the continuous holding notification effect). Specifically, when there are a total of three pieces of reservation storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and reservation storage information that is a specific small hit in the reservation storage information, “+ 3BONUS” as shown in FIG. 21C. By displaying the character "", the continuous holding notification is performed. In the case where there are four pieces of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit in the reserved storage information, the character "+ 4BONUS" is displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (D). By doing so, the continuous holding notification is performed. Although illustration is omitted, when there are a total of two pieces of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit, the characters "+ 2BONUS" are displayed. By doing so, the continuous holding notification is performed. In this way, in the continuous holding notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of pieces of holding storage information that can be a big hit in the holding storage information after the big hit game state is finished, and the number is notified.

  In this way, the number of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit, and the number of the held storage information determined to be the small hit are notified so that they can be specified in the held consecutive notification effect, so the held storage advantageous for the player Since the player can specifically recognize the number of pieces of information, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 22, such a holding continuous notification is executed until a specific period of time at the beginning of the production of the big hit game state, such as before the start of the first round of the big hit game. After the suspension continuous notification is executed, the effect of the first round in the big hit game state is started by the processing during round (S805) in FIG. 19 as shown in, for example, FIG. 21 (E) and FIG. In this way, the pending continuous notification effect is executed across the small hit game state and the big hit game state.

  The reason why the blackout display is executed when the held continuous notification effect is executed is as follows. When the pending consecutive notification effect is executed, the round number suggesting effect shown in FIG. 20 is not executed. When the V-judgment winning device 87 having the deceleration structure described above is used, the game balls slowly flow down the passage on the V-judging winning device 87. Regarding at what time of the open times the V winning occurs, and at what time the upper limit number of ten game balls, which is the ending condition of the open state, enters the V determination winning device 87. Variations occur with each occurrence of a small hit. As a result, the timing when the small hit game state ends varies depending on the occurrence of the small hit. When performing an effect in which the effect changes irregularly in accordance with the number of game balls entering the V determination prize winning device 87, such as the number-of-rounds suggesting effect shown in FIG. 20, the player should feel uncomfortable. It will not be a directing. However, as a performance display during the period from the start of the small hitting game state to the end of the small hitting game state, for example, the ending content is reached after a certain period of time, the story content in which the effect contents change with the passage of time If it is assumed that a certain effect or the like is executed, there is a possibility that the effect state will be discomforting to the player, such that the effect state at the end of the small hit will be different each time a small hit occurs. It is difficult to make an adjustment to make the performance state uniform at the end of the small hit for each occurrence. Therefore, in order to execute the effect of the small hit game that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness, an effect is displayed by a blackout display in which the effect contents do not change. That is, the blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hitting game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to preferably execute the pending continuous notification effect regarding the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

  Based on the fact that when a V prize occurs in the small hitting game state, at least one of the pending storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the pending storage information determined to be the small hit are included. Since the suspended consecutive notification effect can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  Further, when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state, the V winning notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, the continuous holding notification effect can be executed. Therefore, the V winning in the small hitting game state. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect when the occurrence occurs.

  Further, when a V winning occurs in the small hit game state, at least one of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit or the held storage information determined to be the small hit is included. Based on, it is possible to execute the pending continuous notification effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  In addition, in the continuous holding notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of pieces of holding storage information that can be a big hit in the holding storage information after the big hit game state ends, and the number is notified. As a result, the player can specifically recognize the number of pieces of pending storage information that is advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  Further, in the continuous holding notification effect, for example, the total number of pieces of held storage information that can be a big hit in the held storage information, such as “+ 3BONUS” in FIG. 21C and “+ 4BONUS” in FIG. Which production mode the pending continuous notification production is executed due to the difference in the production mode of the special effect executed when the number is less than the predetermined number (3 or the like) and when the number is more than the predetermined number (4 or the like). The player can be paid attention to.

  Note that, in the pending consecutive notification effect of FIG. 21, an example in which the blackout display is executed after the V winning notification is executed for a short time is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blackout display may be executed without the V winning notification. In the case of executing the held continuous notification effect, other images such as a predetermined still image or a moving image that executes a repeated operation for a short period may be displayed without executing the blackout display. Further, the blackout display period may be a fixed period. The holding continuous notification effect may be executed until during the big hit round effect after the end of the small hit game state. When the blackout display period is set to a fixed time when the pending consecutive notification production LA is executed until during the big hit round production, a blackout display for a fixed period is executed from the time of V winning, so the black of the period is executed. The out display period may be a fixed period, and the end time of the blackout display may be indefinite until the round performance of the big hit. In addition, the suspension consecutive notification effect may be executed during the V winning, or may be executed during the opening period of the V determination winning device 87 after the V winning.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a data table used when selecting a production mode of a round number suggestive production. FIG. 23A shows a V aura color change effect pattern table in which a plurality of kinds of effect patterns for changing the color of the V winning aura image 95 in the round number suggesting effect are stored. FIG. 23B shows a V aura color change effect pattern selection table used for selecting an effect pattern for changing the color of the V winning aura image 95 in the round number suggesting effect.

  In FIG. 23 (A), in each effect pattern in which the effect patterns of the first pattern to the eighth pattern are shown, the number of prizes (1 to 10 etc.) to the V determination prize winning device 87 in the small hit game state. ), The color of the V winning aura image 95 is set. For example, in the sixth pattern, the 1st to 2nd colors are white, the 3rd to 6th colors are blue, the 7th to 8th colors are green, and the 9th to 10th colors are red. The data is set. The number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87 is the total value of the game balls detected by the V winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a. As the number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87, the value of the game ball detected by the V determination discharging switch 15b may be used.

  Since the correspondence relationship of “white <blue <green <red <rainbow” is predetermined as the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the number of rounds, in each effect pattern, white → blue → as the winning number increases. A color change pattern is set so that the colors can change in the order of green → red. Iridescent is a color that includes other colors such as blue, green, and red. In this way, due to the effect pattern in which the number of rounds increases and the degree of expectation of the number of rounds changes to a color with a high expectation, the player's expectations can be increased while the V-judgment winning device 87 is open in the small hitting game state. It can be increased, and it can be made difficult for the player to feel when the opening control is extended.

  Unlike the other effect patterns, the eighth pattern is an effect pattern in which the rainbow color is set for all of the first to tenth items and the color does not change and is fixed to the rainbow color. This is because the iridescent color is used as a special color that suggests that the 16 (15) R hour / hour / big hit via small hit has been determined. In addition, as an effect pattern that suggests that the 16 (15) R short-time big hit via small hit is confirmed, for example, an effect pattern whose color can change in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow may be used. Good.

  In FIG. 23 (B), there is shown a correspondence relationship between the types of via small hits and big hits and the first to eighth patterns of FIG. 23 (A). In FIG. 23 (B), for the performance control, each of the 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit via the small hit, the 9 (8) R hour / hour big hit via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R hour / hour big hit via the small hit As one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100, a total of 100 numeric values of the random number SR2 (numeric value range of 0 to 99) for V combo effect pattern selection is assigned to each of the corresponding first pattern to eighth pattern. Has been.

  In FIG. 23 (B), in correspondence with the magnitude relation of the expectation of the large number of rounds, that is, "white <blue <green <red <rainbow", "5 (4) R hourly short hit big hit <small hit" Via 9 (8) R hour / hour big hit <small hit 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit ”, so that the selection rate of the production pattern with a high expected number of rounds for the final 10th color is high. Data is set to. In FIG. 23 (B), the eighth pattern is set to be selectable only in the case of 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit via small hit. Thus, when the round number suggesting effect is executed in the eighth pattern (all of the first to tenth are iridescent), it is determined that the 16 (15) R hour-short and big hit via the small hit is determined. It becomes possible to suggest. The eighth pattern may be selectable also for the big hits other than the 16 (15) R short-time big hit via the small hit.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a holding continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. The hold consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table is stored in the ROM 102.

  In the reservation consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 24, for the case where the total number of reserved consecutive numbers for the symbol 15R hour / hour / big hit and 16 (15) R hour / hour / big hit is 0 to 4, respectively, for effect control A total of 150 numerical values of the random number SR2 (numerical value range of 0 to 149) for determining the presence / absence of pending continuous notification, which is one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100, is "executed (executed)" and "not executed. (Do not execute) ”.

  In this way, the pending continuous notification effect can be executed with the pending storage information that can be a big hit when the special winning opening is opened 15 times. It should be noted that the pending continuous notification effect may be executable for the pending storage information that can be another type of big hit. In the pending continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, data is set such that when the target pending storage information is 0 or 1, "execution is performed" is not determined and only "execution is not performed" is determined. Has been done.

  Further, in the pending continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, data is set so that “execution is possible” can be determined when the total of the pending storage information to be targeted is two or more, and is targeted. The data is set such that the larger the number of pieces of pending storage information is, the higher the ratio of “executed” is determined. Thereby, depending on the number of pending storage information that can be a big hit, which is the number of rounds advantageous to the player, such as the symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot and the small hit via 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot, the pending consecutive notification effect is executed. Since the ratios are different, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how many times the jackpot, which is an advantageous number of rounds, is executed when the held continuous notification effect is executed.

  Furthermore, since the player can recognize that there are a plurality of pieces of pending storage information that can be a big hit when the pending consecutive notification effect is executed, the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  Further, in the holding consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table, among the types of big hits, when the total number of holding consecutive numbers of the symbol 15R hour short and big hit and the small hit via 16 (15) R hour short big hit is two or more, the pending consecutive notification effect is generated. The data is set to run. As a result, when the holding continuous notification effect is executed, a plurality of pieces of holding storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous to the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types are stored. By being able to recognize, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  Further, as the execution target of the pending continuous notification effect, the pending storage information that can be a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds, such as the symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot and the 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot, is used. When it is executed, the player naturally has a high expectation of being in the big hitting game state in which the special winning opening is opened 15 times, which is the most advantageous to the player. Therefore, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production.

  Next, a description will be given of a process for selecting a pending consecutive / round number suggesting effect for determining whether or not to execute the pending consecutive notification effect and the round number suggesting effect and selecting an effect type. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the pending consecutive / round number suggesting effect selection process.

  The holding consecutive / round number suggesting effect selection process of FIG. 25 is included in the process of setting various effects in the effect symbol variation start process (S801 of FIG. 19). In the pending consecutive / round number suggesting effect selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display executed this time is the small hit display result based on the display result designation command received at the time of this change (display The result may be determined based on the identifiable variation pattern command) (S851). The received display result designation command is stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103, and determines whether or not it is a small hit display result depending on whether a command for designating the small hit display result is stored in the area indicating the variable display executed this time. To judge.

  If the small hit display result is not obtained in S851, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is the small hit display result in S851, the current second hold storage information (the hold storage information based on the second start winning combination into the second start winning opening 14) stored in the prefetch process (S501) of FIG. ) Is acquired (S852). Then, based on the acquired second hold storage information, it is confirmed whether or not there is hold storage information that is a symbol big hit (symbol 15R time-short big hit) that is the target of the hold consecutive notification effect (S853), and the target of the hold consecutive notification effect is obtained. It is confirmed whether or not there is pending storage information (a small hit via 16 (15) R time / short win) can be achieved (S854). Next, SR2 is extracted, and based on the confirmation information in S853 and S854, the holding consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table is used to execute the pending consecutive notification effect based on the pending storage information in the current second pending storage information. It is determined whether or not to execute (presence or absence of execution) (S855).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the game is controlled to the small hitting game state, if the player makes a right hitting according to the right hitting promotion notification, a V winning is generated with a probability of about 100% and is controlled to the big hitting game state. Therefore, the pending storage information for the small hit is also determined as the pending storage information for the pending string together with the pending storage information for the big hit.

  When it is determined in S <b> 855 to execute the held consecutive notification effect, the held consecutive notification effect information (for example, notification target holding) is data to be used when executing the held consecutive notification effect corresponding to the current variable display. The number of consecutive pieces, the presence / absence of execution of the held consecutive notice effect, and the like) are stored in a predetermined effect data storage area (S857), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S855 not to execute the held continuous notification effect, it is determined to execute the round suggestion effect (color change effect of the aura image) (S858). Next, based on the display result designation command confirmed in S851, while confirming the type of the small hit via big hit, SR3 is extracted and executed using the V aura color change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 23 (B). The production pattern of the round suggestive production is selected and determined (S859). Then, as the data to be used when executing the round suggestion effect with the determined effect pattern, the effect pattern data stored in the V aura color change effect pattern table in FIG. The effect information (for example, the number-of-rounds suggestive effect pattern, the presence / absence of the number-of-rounds suggestive effect, etc.) is stored in the specific effect data storage area (S860), and the process is ended.

  When it is determined to execute the held continuous notification effect when the variable display is the small hit display result, the held continuous notification effect is executed based on the data stored in S857. On the other hand, when the variable display is the small hit display result, if it is determined not to execute the held consecutive notification effect, the round number suggesting effect is executed based on the data stored in S860. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine that does not have the pending consecutive notification effect, S858 may be executed after S855.

  The number-of-rounds suggestion effect may be executed also when the held consecutive notification effect is executed. In addition, the number-of-rounds suggestive effect is not necessarily executed when the consecutive-retention notification effect is not executed, but when the consecutive-retention notification effect is not executed, it is determined whether or not the round-number suggestion effect is executed by a predetermined lottery. You may. Further, whether or not to execute the round number suggesting effect is determined by a predetermined lottery, and when it is determined to execute the round number suggesting effect, the hold consecutive notification effect may not be executed. In this way, either the pending consecutive notification effect or the number-of-rounds suggesting effect may be executed with priority, or both may be executed without prioritizing either.

  Next, a round number suggesting effect process for executing the above-described round number suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the round number suggesting effect process. The number-of-rounds suggesting effect process of FIG. 26 is configured and executed as a part of the process of opening the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

  In the round number suggesting effect process, first, the round number suggesting effect information (round number suggesting effect pattern, whether or not the round number suggesting effect is executed, etc.) stored in S860 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S840). Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the round number suggesting effect based on the information regarding the presence or absence of the execution of the round number suggesting effect acquired in S840 (S841). If it is not determined in S841 that the round number suggesting effect is to be executed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S841 that the round number suggesting effect is to be executed, it is when the V specific winning ball detection designating command output when the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 is detected. It is confirmed whether or not (S842).

  If the command is not received in S842, the process ends. On the other hand, when the command is received in S842, the winning number counter as a counting unit for counting the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 is updated by adding +1 (S843). Then, the aura image 95 is displayed in a color corresponding to the number counted by the updated winning number counter based on the effect pattern of the round number suggesting effect acquired in S840 (S843). By displaying the aura image 95 in a color corresponding to the number in S843, a round number suggesting effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 is executed. It will be. The V winning image 94 is started to be displayed on the basis of the reception of the V winning designation command in the process of opening the small hit effect (S809). When the V winning is generated, the V specific winning ball is immediately followed. Since the detection designation command is received, in S843, the aura image 95 corresponding to the V winning image 94 is displayed in the color determined in S844 immediately after the V winning occurs. As a result, a round number suggesting effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed is executed as shown in FIGS.

  Next, a description will be given of a first process of the holding continuous notification effect for executing the above-mentioned holding continuous notification effect during the small hit game. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first pending notification production process. The holding continuous notification effect first process of FIG. 27 is configured and executed as a part of the process of opening the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

  In the first consecutive holding notification effect process, first, the consecutive holding notification effect information stored in S857 of FIG. 25 (the number of notification target holding consecutive pieces, the presence or absence of execution of the holding consecutive notification effect, etc.) is acquired (S861). Next, based on the information regarding the presence / absence of execution of the held consecutive notification effect acquired in S861, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the held consecutive notification effect (S862). If it is not determined in S862 that the pending continuous notification effect is to be executed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S862 that the pending consecutive notification effect is to be executed, the V winning ball transmitted to the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a. It is determined whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the detection designation command is received (S863).

  If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the reception of the V winning detection designation command in S863, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is the predetermined period of time after the reception of the V winning detection designation command in S863, based on the information on the number of notification target suspension consecutive obtained in S861, the process during the opening of the small hit production (S809) and the small hit. The blackout display that is executed until the end processing (S810) is completed is started (S864), and the processing is completed. Thereby, the blackout display as shown in FIG. 21B is executed until the end of the small hit game.

  Next, a description will be given of the second process of the continuous holding notification effect which is executed during the big hit display of the continuous holding notification effect. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the second consecutive holding notification effect process. The held continuous notification effect second process of FIG. 28 is configured and executed as a part of the big hit display process (S804 of FIG. 19) of the big hit effect.

  In the held consecutive notification effect second process, first, the held consecutive notification effect information stored in S857 of FIG. 25 (the number of notification subject pending consecutive occurrences, the presence or absence of execution of the held consecutive notification effect, etc.) is acquired (S871). Next, based on the information regarding the presence / absence of execution of the held consecutive notification effect acquired in S871, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the held consecutive notification effect (S872). If it is not determined in S872 that the pending consecutive notification effect is to be executed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S872 that the holding consecutive notification effect is to be executed, + 2BONUS (in the case of two target holding consecutive numbers is set as the holding consecutive notification mode based on the information regarding the notification subject holding consecutive number acquired in S871). ), + 3BONUS (when the number of target holding stations is 3), or + 4BONUS (when the number of target holding stations is 4) is selected (S873). Then, in the hold continuous notification mode selected in S873, execution of the hold continuous notification is started for a predetermined period of time during the big hit display effect period. Thereby, for example, the continuous holding notification as shown in FIGS. 21C and 21D is executed.

[Variation image with modified aura color]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the continuous winning notification effect is produced by the V winning image aura color. In FIG. 21, an example in which the held continuous notification effect is executed by the character information such as “+ 3BONUS” is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect may be performed using the aura image 95 capable of color change as shown in FIG.

  As the pending consecutive notification effect using the aura image 95, the aura image 95 displayed in association with the V winning image 94 is displayed, for example, in response to an increase in the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87. As described above, the color of the aura image 95 may be changed, and an effect of setting the color of the aura image 95 to a specific color such as a rainbow color may be performed as the above-mentioned continuous notification of reservation. Such a continuous holding notification effect displays an aura image based on the fact that the held storage information includes at least one of the held storage information that is a symbol big hit and the held storage information that is a small hit. It is only necessary to execute the hold continuous notification effect by making it possible to change the effect mode of the predetermined effect to the specific mode.

  If such a holding continuous notification effect is executed, based on that the held storage information includes at least one of the held storage information for a symbol big hit and the held storage information for a small hit, the aura Since the effect mode of the effect of displaying the image can be changed to the specific mode, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory information includes the reserved memory information which is a big hit through the symbol big hit or the small hit. As a result, the interest of the game can be further improved by the production.

[Modified Example of Change in Performance Mode of Suspend Continuous Notification Performance]
Next, when executing the holding continuous notification effect, when there are a plurality of total numbers of holding storage information that is a symbol big hit and holding storage information that is a small hit via big hit, and only holding storage information that is a small hit via big hit. An example in which the production mode of the pending continuous notification production is different from the case where there are a plurality of cases will be described.

  For the second pending storage information when the big hit gaming state, for the first holding series type where there is only the pending storage information that is a symbol big hit, and the pending storage information and the small jackpot that becomes the symbol big hit (via small hits) There may be a case of the second holding continuous type in which both of the held storage information that is a big hit exist, and a case of the third holding continuous type in which only a small hit (small hitting big hit) exists. Such a plurality of types of holding consecutives are all called holding consecutives, but when notifying that there is a holding consecutive as the holding consecutive notification effect, the holding consecutive notification is performed in a different effect mode according to the holding consecutive type. May be executed. For example, in the case of the first holding series type, the holding series notification is made with a katakana such as "+3 bonus", and in the case of the second holding series type, the holding series notification is made with English characters such as "+ 3BONUS", In the case of the third hold series type, the hold series notification may be made using a hiragana such as "+3 bonus". In addition, when notifying that there is a pending ream, an image such as a character relating to the pending ream notification may be displayed in a different color depending on the pending ream type. In addition, when notifying that there is a holding sequence, different character images are displayed according to the holding sequence type (either the display associated with the number of holding sequences or the character image alone display may be performed) to notify the holding sequence. You may make it display the image, such as a character regarding. In addition, for each of the first to third holding continuous types, a rendering mode such as “+3 bonus”, a rendering mode such as “+ 3BONUS”, and a plurality of types such as “+3 bonus” From the effect modes, the effect modes may be selected and determined by lottery. In that case, the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed may be different for each of the first to third consecutive retention types.

  By executing such a held consecutive notification effect, it is possible to change the effect mode of the held consecutive notification effect to be executed according to the held consecutive notification type. Therefore, the held consecutive notification effect is executed in any of the effect modes. You can draw the player's attention to Rika. In addition, in each of the first holding continuous type to the third holding continuous type, when the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is made different, in which effect mode the reserved alarm notification effect is executed. Can make people pay attention.

[Modified Example of Limiting Control of Suspended Continuous Notification]
Next, after executing the held series notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of held series, the execution of the held series notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all of the held storage information targeted for the held series notification effect is exhausted. ) Will be described.

  In the second hold storage information when the big hit game state, when executing the hold continuous notification effect when there is a plurality of hold storage information that is a symbol big hit and a small hit (big hit via the small hit) In, the big hit game state in which the holding continuous notification effect was executed, the big hit which is the holding continuous notification target is executed, and even in the big hit game state, when the holding continuous notification effect is executed, the holding continuous notification Whether the notification effect is continuously executed with the pending storage information of the pending series that was the notification target in the previous big hit game state, or the pending storage information of the pending series based on the newly generated pending storage information As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is newly executed, resulting in an unclear effect.

  Therefore, after executing the held consecutive notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of held consecutive times, the execution of the held consecutive notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all the held storage information targeted for the held consecutive notification effect is exhausted. It suffices to execute the effect control. After the pending continuous notification effect is executed, the pending continuous restriction flag is set and new pending storage information is confirmed until the variable display based on all the pending storage information targeted for the notification continuous notification is executed. It is sufficient to limit the execution of the effect control process so that the process for executing the continuous holding notification is not executed. By doing this, after executing the held consecutive notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of held consecutive notifications, the execution of the held consecutive notification effect is executed until all the held storage information that is the target of the held consecutive notification effect is exhausted. By prohibiting, new execution of the pending continuous notification effect is restricted, and thus it is possible to clarify which of the pending storage information to be notified of the pending continuous notification effect.

  In addition, after executing the held consecutive notification effect for informing that there are a plurality of held consecutive notifications, the execution of the held consecutive notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all of the held storage information targeted for the held consecutive notification effect is exhausted. For example, the following effects may be executed.

  For example, after executing the held-repair notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of held renditions, the number of held reams is displayed in a manner that can be specified by the number of stock images such as icon images, and is the target of the held-repair notification effect. It may be possible to reduce the icon images each time the jackpot gaming state is exhausted. Furthermore, when performing the continuous notification of the hold based on the newly generated hold storage information, an effect of increasing such an icon image may be provided. In this way, by visualizing the number of notification objects of the pending series so that the player can recognize it, it is possible to execute the pending series notification effect that the player can easily understand. Further, if such an effect is executed, after executing the held consecutive notification effect, rather than limiting the execution of the held consecutive notification effect until all of the held storage information targeted for the held consecutive notification effect is exhausted. Also, the number of times the held consecutive notification effect is recognized by the player is increased, and an interesting effect can be executed.

[Modified Example of Execution Timing of Suspended Notification Information]
Next, an example will be described in which the above-described suspended consecutive notification effect is executed during the V-combo effect (VCOMBO effect). V combo production, when it becomes "symbol big hit" or "big hit via small hit" based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 14, during a predetermined period between predetermined rounds during the big hit gaming state. , Is an effect of notifying the number of prize balls paid out (value added) in a big hit game state at a predetermined stage, and is mainly an effect of notifying the number of prize balls paid out in plural times in stages.

[Examples of specific effects when changing display after a big hit]
Next, during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R hour short and big hit caused by the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of pending storage information and the prefetch determination of the pending storage information are determined. Based on the result, the specific effect of performing the big hit pre-reading effect in the pending storage information will be described.

  FIG. 29 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of a specific effect. FIG. 30 is a timing chart of the specific effect. The specific effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  In FIG. 29, an example of the specific effect is shown according to the passage of time, and images having little relation to the specific effect are omitted. In FIG. 30, while showing an effect that matches the effect contents of the specific effect of FIG. 29, and in order to show the overall control image of the specific effect in an easy-to-understand manner, a single variable display after the end of the 4R symbol time-saving and jackpot is displayed. The example performed by the variable display by the 2nd special symbol is shown. In addition, in FIG. 30, four pieces of the second reserved memory information are accumulated during the winning promotion effect, and the second reserved memory that is a big hit through the symbol big hit or the small hit in the second reserved memory information up to the third piece. Information was not included (for example, if the 4th second reserved memory information includes a big hit for the symbol big hit or a small hit, and for the 4th second reserved memory information, the big hit symbol) Either the case where the big hit via the small hit is not included), an example is shown in which, after the end of the change display, all the four change displays accumulated during the winning promotion performance are sequentially executed. There is.

  29 (A) to (O) and FIG. 30 show an example of the specific effect. After the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time-short big hit, in the period until the second special symbol is variably displayed once, it becomes a high base state by executing the electric Chu support control, so the variable winning ball device 15 Winning a prize for (Den Chu) is facilitated. Therefore, it becomes easy to accumulate the second pending storage information by winning the variable winning ball device 15. As for the second reserved memory information, since the winning probability of the small hit that can be a big hit via the small hit is a high probability of about 1/7, a small hit is included in the maximum of four pieces of the second reserved memory information. Suspended storage information, which is a big hit via the way, may be included with a relatively high frequency.

  As an effect corresponding to the mechanism of such a game control, during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R hourly short hit, during the first variable display, the prefetch effect with the second reserved storage information as the prefetch target. The specific effect as is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, at the start of the specific effect, the effect display device 9 performs the specific effect start effect of displaying the specific effect start image 9A indicating the start of the specific effect such as “start of final determination”. At the same time, the display of a determination effect moving image (not shown) that is a moving image such as a predetermined movie image is started. The determination effect video is, for example, a movie video with a series of stories such as a battle effect in which an ally (player's ally) character and an enemy character battle each other as a background moving image and ends from the start of the specific effect. It is continuously displayed until the time. The specific effect start effect is executed for the first predetermined period so that the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is executed.

  The left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 are variably displayed in a variable display mode of small symbols that are variably displayed in a reduced mode in the upper right corner of the screen. The downward arrow in the figure indicates that the variable display is in progress.

  When the determination start effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), in the effect display device 9, a prize promotion for promoting the prize winning of the game ball to the variable prize ball device 15 such as "Hold reserve!" The winning promotion effect for displaying the image 9B is executed. The prize-winning promotion effect is also an effect that promotes winning of the game ball into the variable winning ball device 15, and is an effect that promotes the accumulation of the second hold storage information. In this embodiment, a "promote reserve!" Prize winning promotion image is displayed in order to promote the accumulation of the second pending storage information, but promotes the winning of game balls to the variable winning ball device 15. In that sense, it is possible to execute a winning promotion effect that displays a winning promotion image in which a specific winning portion such as “Let's win prize in Den!” Is specified.

  In the winning promotion effect, for example, the second predetermined period required from the time when the number of the second hold storage information is “0” to the maximum “4” is set as the longest period, Even during the second predetermined period, when the number of the second hold storage information becomes the maximum "4", it ends at that point in order to suppress the useless discharge of the game ball thereafter.

  After the execution of the winning promotion effect, a change effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect according to the number of the second hold storage information can be executed. Specifically, when the second hold storage information is “0”, as shown in FIG. 29C, left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the current variation display (the variation display). As the image of, the image of the effect design (hereinafter referred to as the reach pattern) in which the reach mode (7 ↓ 7) is formed with the design of “7” is displayed in the center part of the screen. As shown in FIGS. 29C to 29G, the winning promotion image 9B is continuously displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a reduced mode until the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4). It The winning promotion image 9B is erased immediately after the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4) as shown in FIG.

  When the second piece of second hold storage information is "0" and the first piece of second hold storage information is generated, as shown in FIG. 29D, the hold first piece change effect for changing the effect mode is executed. It In the first hold pending change effect, one reach symbol is added to correspond to the increase in the number of second retained memories, and the reach symbols are displayed in a reduced manner so that two reach symbols are lined up downward from the upper center of the screen. The effect image is changed to the effect. In FIG. 29 (D), the top reach symbol indicates the currently changing effect symbols 91, 92, 93, and the second reach symbol indicates the look-ahead effect symbol 94 corresponding to the first reserved item. . The image of the effect design in which the reach pattern is formed is called a reach line. In this way, when the first piece of the second reserved storage information is generated, as shown in FIG. 29D, the effect control for changing the number of reach lines to two (2 lines) is executed. The effect of additionally displaying the look-ahead effect design 94 including the reach pattern is called a reach line increase effect.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (E), when the second second hold storage information is generated and the second hold storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect design 94 including the corresponding reach symbol of "7" is first. The second holding change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying the read-ahead effect pattern 94 displayed on the screen and increasing the number of reach lines (total of three lines). As shown in FIG. 29 (F), when the third second hold storage information is generated and the second hold storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect design 94 including the corresponding "7" reach design is first. The third hold change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying the read-ahead effect pattern 94 displayed in (4) and increasing the number of reach lines (total of four lines). As shown in FIG. 29 (G), when the fourth second storage information is generated and the second storage information is increased, the prefetching effect design 94 including the corresponding reach symbol “7” is first The fourth reserved change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying below the look-ahead effect pattern 94 displayed in (1) and increasing the number of reach lines (5 lines in total).

  As described above, in the specific effect, the change effect that changes the effect mode to increase the number of reach lines by displaying the look-ahead effect symbol 94 including the reach symbol in response to the increase in the number of the second held storage information is changed. Done. With the image displayed corresponding to the increase in the number of the second held storage information in the specific effect, the number of reach lines of the look-ahead effect design 94 including the reach pattern of "7" is increased and displayed is as follows. There is.

  First, in the variable display other than the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, the reach pattern when the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the reach display mode for the effect symbol is, for example, “7 symbols> 3 symbols> other numbers. Due to the relationship of "design", selection is determined so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different. Therefore, the player's expectation for a big hit is highest when the reach symbol of "7" is reached among the reach symbols selected from a plurality of types. Therefore, in the specific effect, each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 of the variable display is a reach symbol of "7" from the viewpoint of a high degree of expectation that it is a big hit depending on the type of reach symbol. Is displayed by. As a result, in the specific effect, by displaying each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 of the variable display with the reach symbol of "7" that the player feels advantageous, a big hit in the player is achieved. You can raise expectations. Furthermore, in the specific effect, the effect that the number of reach lines is increased by the reach pattern of "7" can further enhance the player's expectation for a big hit.

  As the reach symbol used for the reach line number increasing effect in the specific effect, a symbol other than “7” may be used. For example, a pattern (characters that suggest a advantageous state for the player such as a big hit rush, a small hit rush, and a rush in a short working time (electrically supported state)) (in a normal variable display) It is also possible to use a special production-specific pattern that is not used.

  Further, the reach symbol “3” may be used. The reason is as follows. In the pachinko machine, generally, the reach pattern of "7" is a high expectation of a big hit, a high expectation of the maximum number of rounds when a big hit occurs, and a jackpot after the game state ends. It is used as a symbol that the player expects to have a high degree of expectation that it will be in an advantageous state for the player (time saving state, electric power support state, probability variation state in a game machine that is in a probability variation state, etc.). For example, the reach pattern when the reach display mode for the effect symbol is, for example, "7 symbols> 3 symbols> other numerical symbols" has a relationship that the maximum number of rounds when a big hit is expected is expected. In some cases, different settings may be selected and determined. As a result, it is expected that a general player will have an expectation that the number of rounds when a big hit occurs will be the maximum big hit when the reach symbol of "7" is displayed.

  Depending on the distribution of the number of rounds when it becomes a big hit, the distribution of the big hit type generated by the variable display of the first special symbol and the distribution of the big hit type generated by the variable display of the second special symbol are the big hits of the maximum round number. In some cases, the selection ratio of types is set lower than the selection ratio of jackpot types other than the maximum number of rounds. In such a case, when a big hit is made based on the reach pattern of "7", which also has a meaning to suggest a big hit of the maximum number of rounds in the specific effect, a big hit type of a number of rounds other than the maximum number of rounds is selected. In some cases, When a jackpot type other than the maximum number of rounds is selected despite the jackpot being based on the reach symbol of "7", the player feels that the jackpot based on the reach symbol of "7" is the maximum number of rounds. In some cases, the player's feeling may not match the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In order to prevent such a sense inconsistency, the above-mentioned expected degree of the maximum number of rounds is smaller than "7", and the design of "3", which has a higher jackpot expectation than other numerical designs, is specified. May be used as a reach pattern for forming a reach line.

  In addition, as the reach line increase production by the reach design in the specific production, the reach selected from the design of "7", the design of "3", and the design other than that at a predetermined ratio according to the degree of expectation to be a big hit. You may form the reach line by a design. In that case, depending on the type of reach symbol displayed as the reach line, the above-described expectation for the big hit and expectation for the maximum number of rounds of the big hit may be changed. By doing so, the variety of reach patterns on the reach line is enriched, and the player can recognize the degree of expectation that the respective second hold storage information and the like will be a big hit, so that the fun of the effect is improved.

  In addition, such a special effect is the first special display as the first variable display after the end of the symbol 4R time junior big hit game state other than the time of the first variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the symbol 4R time junior big hit game state. It may be executed when the variable display of the symbols is executed. Further, such a specific effect may be executed in a variable display at a predetermined timing after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit other than the symbol 4R hourly short hit.

  When the number of pieces of the second pending storage information reaches the upper limit value or when the second predetermined period elapses after the winning promotion effect is started, the winning promotion effect is ended and shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to (J). A suggestive effect is executed to indicate whether or not such a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R time-short big hit). If the number of pieces of the second hold storage information reaches the upper limit value before the second predetermined period elapses during the execution period of the winning promotion effect, the effect is not advanced until the suggestion effect execution start timing is reached. It becomes a waiting period to wait for the passage of. Since the start timing of the suggested effect is set to a fixed timing in advance, such a waiting period is provided for the winning promotion effect. The waiting period is not a period for executing a special effect or the like, but a period for waiting for the progress of the effect (note that during the waiting period, a predetermined effect such as an effect indicating that the second held storage information is full). You may display the effect image of). In the suggestive effect, as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to (J), the display results are derived and displayed in order from the top in the reach line arranged in the vertical direction corresponding to the variable display and the second reserved storage information. To go. Specifically, the reach in the order of this change (referred to as the change) → first reserved storage information → second reserved storage information → third reserved storage information → fourth reserved storage information. A combination of stop symbols is shown for each line. A combination of such stop symbols is also called a suggestive effect symbol.

  Regarding each of the fluctuation display and the stored second holding storage information, when the small hit (big hit via small hit) or the big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit) is not obtained, FIGS. 29 (H) and (I) As shown in, the corresponding reach symbol is displayed as a suggestive effect symbol stopped by a combination of the deviating symbols (a combination in which the “7” symbols are not aligned). FIG. 29 (J) shows a display example when the second second held storage information is a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R short time big hit).

  For each of the variable display and the stored second holding storage information, when a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit), for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (J) , The corresponding reach symbol stops at the combination of the jackpot symbols (the combination in which the symbols of "7" are aligned), and is enlarged and emphasized. The symbol combination in which the three symbols are arranged is associated with an advantageous state (big hit etc.) for the player. As a result, during the variable display, for each of the variable display and the stored second holding storage information, a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R short-time big hit) that is advantageous to the player is achieved. It is suggested.

  In this way, in the suggestive effect, by displaying a symbol combination image that is associated with a state advantageous to the player before it becomes a realistic jackpot, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. By displaying a symbol combination image that suggests a big hit from the timing before the variable display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the player is relieved at an early timing and the interest of the player is raised from the early timing. be able to. The suggestive effect period for performing such suggestive effect is set to be executed in a common constant effect period regardless of the number of reach lines.

  In the suggestion effect, if there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via small hits) or big hits (symbol 15R short time big hits) among the variable display and the stored second holding storage information, it is dealt with. Each of the plurality of reach symbols is stopped by a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination in which the symbols of "7" are aligned), and is enlarged and highlighted.

  In addition, if there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via the small hits) or big hits (short time big hits at the time of the symbol 15R) among the variable display and the stored second holding storage information, the small hits (small hits) The one with the earlier timing of becoming a big hit via the way) or a big hit (Short-term big hit in the pattern 15R) (for example, the second reserved memory information for the second piece and the second reserved memory information for the third piece are information for a small hit or a big hit). In some cases, only the one corresponding to the second second reserved memory information) is targeted, and the corresponding reach symbol is stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols (the combination in which the symbols of "7" are gathered), and enlarged. You may make it emphasized.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (J), the symbols stopped and displayed in the combination of the big hit symbols in which the symbols of “7” are aligned are the big hits or the big hits through the small hits or the big hits (symbols) based on the corresponding variable display or pending storage information. It is an image that suggests in advance that 15R hour short-term big hit) will occur, and thereafter, until the corresponding variable display (variable display or variable display based on pending storage information) is executed and the display result is derived and displayed, It is continuously displayed as an image suggesting (notifying) that the player is in an advantageous state.

  After the suggestive effect is executed, at the end of the variable display, the following display is performed. In the suggestion effect, the variable display does not become a big hit or a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time junior big hit), but the second pending storage information shows a big hit or a big hit via the small hit (a design 15R time junior big hit). When included, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), the look-ahead effect design 94 corresponding to the second hold storage information stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols is displayed in the center of the screen as a suggestion effect design, and the variable display is performed. The variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.

  Also, in the suggestion effect, the variable display is a big hit or a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time junior big hit), and the change display in the second hold storage information is a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time junior big hit) Hold When the stored information is not included, the variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the variable display stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols is displayed at the center of the screen.

  Further, in the suggestion effect, the variable display is a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (a big hit at the time of the pattern 15R), and the second hold storage information is a big hit or a big hit via the small hit (a big hit at the time of the pattern 15R). When included, the variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the variable display stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols, and the look-ahead effect symbol corresponding to the second reserved storage information stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols. The 94 variable display results are displayed in the center of the screen.

  In the variable display based on the second hold storage information after the suggestive effect is finished, an effect is displayed (notified) while notifying (displaying) that it is a big hit as the main symbol, and notifying as being a small symbol. It may be done.

  In the suggestion effect, the variable display does not become a big hit or a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time junior big hit), but the second pending storage information shows a big hit or a big hit via the small hit (a design 15R time junior big hit). When it is not included, at the end of the series of suggestive effects, the combination of the out-reach symbols of the reach line, which is the combination of out-of-reach symbols, is displayed in the center of the screen.

  When there are a plurality of suggestive effect designs 94 stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols in the suggestive effect, a plurality of look-ahead effect designs 94 are displayed in the combination of the big hit symbols at the end of the variable display. If there are a plurality of look-ahead effect designs 94 stopped by a combination of big hit symbols in the suggested effect, one look-ahead effect effect symbol 94 may be displayed as a representative image in a combination of big hit symbols at the end of the variable display. .

  After the variable display becomes a display result that is off, as shown in FIGS. 29L to 29O, the variable display is sequentially executed for the second pending storage information that is the target of the specific effect. FIG. 29 is an example in which suggestion that the second second held storage information is a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R time short big hit) in the suggestion effect, in that case, The state in which the prefetch effect design 94 corresponding to the second pending storage information stopped by the combination of the jackpot designs shown in 29 (K) is displayed in the central portion of the screen is continued, as shown in FIGS. 29 (L) to (O). The variable display of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the respective pieces of reserved storage information itself is executed in a reduced mode (small symbol mode) in the lower right corner of the screen.

  In the specific effect, when the look-ahead effect design 94 is subjected to the variable display of the second pending storage information (the second pending storage information in this example) for which the big hit symbol has been combined, when the variable display of FIG. As described above, the display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 variably displayed in the lower right corner of the screen becomes a big hit display result, and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 continuously displayed in the center part of the screen is enlarged and emphasized. . As a result, in the specific effect, an effect of informing that the small hit (big hit via small hit) or the big hit (symbol 15R short time big hit) suggested by the suggestion effect is performed is performed. The determination effect moving image continuously displayed as a series of movie images from the start of the specific effect is ended when the big hit display is executed and the specific effect is ended, as shown in FIG. 29 (O). It

  By executing such a specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, the change effect is executed in accordance with the number of pieces of storage information stored when the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect is changed. By changing the effect mode, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game due to the fun of the effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, the change effect and the hold in the specific effect are executed by executing the change effect in association with the increase in the number of held storage information due to the winning promotion effect. It is possible for the player to clearly recognize the relationship with the stored information number. Further, it is possible to prevent the production from ending without the change production being executed in the specific production.

  As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, as the change effect in the specific effect, the change is performed by executing the reach line increase effect that increases the number of reach lines in accordance with the increase in the number of the second hold storage information. It is possible to make the relationship between the effect and the number of the second hold storage information easier to visually understand.

  As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, as a change effect in the specific effect, the number of reach lines of the same “7” symbol is increased in accordance with the increase in the number of held storage information, thereby changing the reach mode type. Accordingly, it is not necessary to consider a production pattern relating to the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player such that the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player is changed. Therefore, development control of production control can be facilitated. Further, as the number of reach symbols increases, the player comes to pay attention to the specific effect with a certain expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the suggestion production period can be executed in the same production period regardless of the number of reach lines, whereby the development control of production control can be facilitated.

  As shown in (G) and (H) of FIG. 29, the winning promotion effect is suppressed when the number of the second reservation storage information reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), thereby suppressing the unnecessary promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the production.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O), a specific effect is executed in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of pieces of pending storage information by an effect using a series of images such as a determination effect moving image, so that a game is performed by the effect. The interest of can be improved.

  In the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the suggestion effect, the effect patterns 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestion effect pattern 94 are not stopped in a predetermined order as the effect. You may perform the effect of stopping at the same time once.

  Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the effect patterns 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestive effect pattern 94 are stopped in the suggestive effect, an operation means image such as a button image is displayed. It is displayed and an operation prompting display such as a "press" image is displayed, and the suggestive effect design 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order in accordance with the operation of the player (operation of the push button 120 or the like), or once. You may make an effect to stop at the same time.

  Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the effect patterns 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestive effect pattern 94 are stopped in the suggestive effect, an operation means image such as a button image is displayed. There are cases where it is displayed and cases where it is not displayed, and at a rate set so that the expectation that it will be in an advantageous state for the player (for example, small hit or big hit) is higher than the case where it is not displayed After displaying the operation means image and performing the operation promotion display such as the "press" image, the suggestive effect design 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order in accordance with the operation of the player (operation of the push button 120, etc.), Alternatively, an effect of simultaneously stopping at once may be performed.

  In addition, in the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, after starting the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29 (B), it corresponds to each of the pending storage information as shown in FIGS. 29 (C) to (G). When the number of pieces of the second held storage information reaches a maximum of "4" or the second predetermined period elapses without executing the changed effect described above, the reach corresponding to the second held storage information during that time is reached. You may make it perform the production | generation which displays the reach line by a pattern collectively, and forms it at once (display which increases the number of reach lines at once).

  In the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second hold storage information is for the effect that suggests that the suggestive effect will be a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R short-time big hit). An example was shown in which the order corresponding to the order of occurrence was suggested. However, not limited to this, the order to execute the effect suggesting that it will be a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (design 15R short time big hit) is that the second hold storage information is generated at the start of the suggested effect. The selection may be determined randomly regardless of the order in which the steps are performed.

  Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (symbol) is executed by simply executing an effect in which the variation display result of each reach line is derived and displayed in the suggested effect. It was suggested that it would be 15R hour short and big hit), but not only such a variable display result but also a predetermined effect such as a battle effect (effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight) and a reach line display result. It may be executed in combination with the derivation effect. For example, an image of a battle effect is displayed before deriving and displaying the display result of each reach line, and when the teammate character wins, it becomes a combination of big hit symbols, and when the teammate character loses, it becomes a combination of offset symbols. A combination of effects may be used. Such a combination of effects may be executed at a turning point, for example, a combination of effects may be executed twice for the first reach line and the last reach line, and only for the last reach line. May be executed. Further, the timing of executing the combination of effects may be randomly selected. Further, the timing of executing the combination of effects may be different depending on whether the expectation that a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a short win at the time of the symbol 15R) is high and when the expectation is low. Such a combination of effects may or may not be executed. When a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R short-time big hit) is executed, there is a probability of 100%. Of course, it may not be executed when a small hit or a big hit is not achieved. In addition, as the timing at which the effect by such a combination is executed gets closer to the last reach line, the expectation may be higher if the hit is a small hit or a big hit. If the effects can be executed by such various combinations, the variations of the effects can be abundant, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved by the fun of the effects.

  Further, in the suggestive effects as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to (J), when the reach symbol is a combination of deviating symbols, the symbol combination may be deleted from the screen thereafter.

  Next, the specific effect first process for executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 in the effect symbol changing process (S802) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the specific effect first process. The specific effect first process of FIG. 31 is configured and executed as a part of the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  In the specific effect first process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display executed this time is the first variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R hour short and big hit (( S881).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, as a variation pattern to be selected at the time of variation display, there is a special effect pattern as an effect pattern to be always selected at the time of the first time variable display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time / short hit It is provided. In the game control microcomputer 560, in the variation pattern setting process (S301) of FIG. 10, it is determined whether or not it is the first variation display time of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time / short hit is over. When it is determined that the processing step and the first variation display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R hour / short hit by the processing step is the variation pattern of the variation display at that time, the above-mentioned It includes a processing step of selecting a special fluctuation pattern and a processing step of transmitting a fluctuation pattern command designating the selected special fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In S881, whether or not the above-described special variation pattern is received is confirmed based on the data in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103, and the variation display result of the variation display executed this time is It is determined whether or not it is the first variable display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time-short big hit.

  In S881, in the determination of whether or not it is the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R short-time big hit, when it is determined that it is not, the process is terminated, and it is determined that there is. At this time, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start of variable display (S882). When it is determined in S882 that the variable display is started, the display of the determination start effect is started and the display of the determination effect moving image is started (S883), and the process is ended, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in S882 that it is not the start time of the variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the determination start effect by checking the elapsed time from the start of the determination start effect (S884). .

  When it is determined in S884 that the determination start effect is finished, the display of the determination start effect is ended (S885). Then, after starting the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29 (B), a series of effects for displaying the reach line with the “7” symbol as shown in FIG. 29 (C) is started (S886), and the process is executed. finish. In addition, when the number of the second hold storage information is not “0” at the time of starting the specific effect, but there are some, the initial hold value of the second hold storage information is displayed when the first reach line is displayed. Display a reach line of numbers.

  When it is determined in S884 that it is not the time to end the determination start effect, it is determined whether or not it is the time to receive the second start winning award designation command. It is determined whether there is any (S887). When it is determined in S887 that the starting winning prize is reached, the starting winning prize counter serving as a counting means for counting the number of starting winning prizes to the second starting winning prize 14 in the specific effect is updated by incrementing by 1 (S888). The starting winning prize number counter is a counting unit that counts the number of starting winning balls to the second starting winning opening 14 when the specific effect is executed. The starting prize number counter counts the number of starting winning balls to the second starting winning port 14 with the second reserved memory information number (eg, “0” etc.) at the start of the specific effect as an initial value. Next, according to the starting winning number counted by the starting winning number counter updated in S888, a change effect as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G is executed (S889), and the process is ended.

  When it is determined in S887 that it is the time of the start winning, it is determined whether it is the end of the winning promotion notification effect (S890). In S890, the value of the start winning number counter has reached the upper limit value (4) of the second hold storage information, or the execution period of the predetermined promotion notification effect (the above-mentioned second predetermined period) has ended. When at least one of the above is established, it is determined that the end of the winning promotion notification effect. When it is determined in S890 that the winning promotion notification effect has ended, the winning promotion notification effect is ended (S891) as shown in FIG. 29 (H) and stored in the prefetching process (S501) of FIG. The current second reserved storage information (reserved storage information based on the second starting winning into the second starting winning opening 14) is acquired (S892). Then, based on the acquired second hold storage information, the processing for starting the suggestive effect as shown in FIGS. 29H to 29J is executed (S893), and the processing ends.

  Specifically, in S893, for the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 that are currently changing, a symbol big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit) or a small hit (small hit via 16 (15) R) based on the received display result command. Time saving big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short hit big hit, small hit via 5 (4) R time short hit big hit) is determined, and the prefetch effect design 94 corresponding to the second hold storage information is acquired. Based on the 2nd holding storage information, each holding storage information is a pattern big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit) or small hit (small hit via 16 (15) R time short big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short big hit, small It is determined whether or not a hit-through 5 (4) R hour / hour big hit) is achieved. Then, in S893, based on such a determination result, among the reach symbols displayed on the effect display device 9, the one corresponding to the second pending storage information that is a symbol big hit or a small hit is a big hit symbol. The combination (777) is displayed, and for the one corresponding to the second held storage information that is out of alignment, the effect of displaying the combination of outlying symbols (combination other than 777) is sequentially executed for each reach symbol displayed. The effect pattern to be played is determined, and the determined effect is started.

  In the suggestive effect, an effect other than the effect for deriving the display result on the reach line such as a specific chance up notice may be executed together. When such an effect is also executed, in S893, The effect pattern is selected and determined, and execution is started. For example, when executing an advance notice of a chance to change the background image color to blue, green, red, gold, etc. according to the degree of expectation of a small hit or a big hit (big hit expectation is blue <green <red <gold) , Confirming the content of the second reserved storage information, and a predetermined chance up notice data table (a data table in which the selection ratio of the background image is changed depending on whether there is the second reserved storage information of the small hit or the big hit, etc. ), The process of selecting and determining the background image color may be performed.

  When it is determined in S890 that it is not the end time of the prize promotion notification effect, it is determined whether it is the end time of the suggestion effect by checking whether it is the end time of the variable display currently being executed. Yes (S894). If it is determined in S894 that it is not the time to end the suggestive effect, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S894 that the suggestion effect has ended, the suggestion effect is ended (S895), the specific effect execution flag is set (S896), and the process ends.

  The specific effect execution flag set in S896 is a flag indicating whether or not the specific effect is being executed, and is provided for the following purpose. First, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), when the display result of the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R hour / short hit is displayed during the execution of the specific effect, In S803 of FIG. 19, it is confirmed whether or not the specific effect execution flag is set, and when it is set, the variable display result at the end of the variable display in the effect mode of the specific effect as shown in FIG. 29 (K). Is displayed. Second, in the production period of the specific effect shown in FIG. 29, after the first variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R hour short and big hit is finished, FIG. 29 (L)-( When the variable display based on the second pending storage information as shown in (O) is executed, it is used to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the specific effect second process shown in FIG. 30.

  32 is a flowchart showing the specific effect second process. The specific effect second process of FIG. 32 is configured and executed as a part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  In the specific effect second process, first, in order to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed, it is determined whether or not the specific effect executing flag is set (S901). If the specific effect executing flag is not set in S901, the process ends. On the other hand, when the constant effect executing flag is set in S901, the effect data necessary for executing the variable display in the changing mode at the time of the specific effect as shown in, for example, FIGS. It is set (S902). Then, the start prize number counter is decremented by "-1" (S903). By subtracting the start winning number counter in S903, whether or not the second reserved storage information accumulated during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time / short hit has been consumed by the variable display It becomes possible to confirm whether.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the starting winning number counter has reached "0" (S904). That the starting prize number counter has become "0" means that all of the reserved memory information accumulated during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R hour / short hit has been exhausted. Shows. If the start winning number counter is not "0" in S904, the process ends. On the other hand, when the starting winning number counter is "0" in S904, the specific effect executing flag is reset (S905), the determination effect moving image display is ended (S905), and the process is ended. As a result, when all of the reserved storage information accumulated during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R short-time jackpot has been exhausted, the specific effect ends.

[Explanation on Characteristic Parts 244F / 245F]
Next, the characteristic parts 244F and 245F of the present embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic portions 244F and 245F, the production control microcomputer 100 has a short-time state after the end of the big-hit gaming state of various big-hit as shown in FIG. 2 (for example, in the case of the symbol 15R time-short big hit, the second special symbol variation 7). Display control to display the remaining number of variable displays (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining number of time reductions) that can be executed during the first time or the first and second special symbol variation total of 11 times, etc.) Then, a technique for performing various characteristic display controls regarding the display control will be described.

  Regarding the characteristic portion 244F, the display of the remaining number of time reductions for the second variation display (hereinafter, also referred to as the second variable display or the second special symbol variation) executed based on the second reserved memory during the time reduction state is performed. As the display control to be executed when the first variable display (hereinafter, also referred to as the first variable display or the first special symbol variation) executed based on the first reserved memory is executed, the first display control An example and a second display control example will be described.

  As an example of the first display control, in the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed while the remaining time saving number for the second variable display is being displayed, the remaining time saving number is not displayed. The display control for doing so will be described.

  As a second display control example, in the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of time saving is displayed for the second variable display, and when the first variable display is executed The display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of time reductions will be described.

  For various jackpots as shown in FIG. 2, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the total number of times the first variable display and the second variable display is the first number (for example, 11 times) during the time saving state after the jackpot game state is over. 2nd variable display (2nd special symbol variation) during the first condition that became 1st condition) and 2nd number of times (eg 7th etc.) that is smaller than the 1st number of times. The control for ending the time saving state is executed based on the satisfaction of either one of the conditions.

  Regarding the characteristic part 245F, regarding the display of the remaining number of variable displays during the time saving state, at least the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second number. When the remaining number of the second variable display until the condition is satisfied is exceeded, the remaining number of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of the variable display during the time saving state, and at least until the first condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display of is less than the remaining number of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of the total number is set as the remaining number. The display control to be displayed will be described.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 displays the remaining number of variable display of special symbols (time saving remaining number) that can be executed during the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state on the effect display device 9, and according to the game situation. , Display control of the remaining number of times is executed.

[Example of first display control]
FIG. 33-1 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a first display control example of the number of remaining hours saved. In FIG. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of an effect mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 15R time saving large hit (see FIG. 2). In FIG. 33-1 during the time saving state, after the variable display of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times as shown in (A) to (H), the jackpot display result is derived and displayed as shown in (I). An example of control is shown.

  As an example, the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 15R time saving large hit, the first condition that the total number of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state is 11 times, and the time saving concerned The number of times of the second special symbol change in the state is 7 times and it ends based on the satisfaction of either one of the conditions of the second condition. Hereinafter, during the time saving state, the remaining number of the total number of times the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which is the first condition of the time saving ending condition, is referred to as "total remaining number", and the second condition of the time saving termination condition The remaining number of times of only a certain second special symbol variation is called "second special symbol remaining number".

  As shown in FIG. 33-1 (A), when the jackpot gaming state is finished, a time saving start display image 98 in which the characters “Chance time rush” is displayed is displayed, and it is notified that the time saving state is started. As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (A) to (H), a right-handed image 97 instructing (promoting) right-handing (aiming to win the second starting winning opening 14) during the time saving state. Is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), at the start of the time saving state (total remaining number of times 11 times, second special figure remaining number of times 7), “7 remaining times” is displayed as an image showing the number of remaining times in the time saving state. The remaining time saving image 96 is displayed. The time saving remaining number image 96 displaying “remaining 7 times” shows the remaining number of only the second special symbol variation which is the second condition of the time saving ending condition.

  In the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the second special figure remaining number is set as the time saving remaining number of times. Display the number of times. In the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. To do. Further, in the time saving state, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied and the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the second special figure remaining number is set as the time saving remaining number of times. Display the number of times.

  When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied and the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times may be displayed as the time saving remaining number.

  In this example, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is equal to or more than the second special figure remaining number until the second condition is satisfied, the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number, When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number.

  To give a specific example, the following display of the number of remaining time reductions is performed. For example, “total remaining number 11 times, second special figure remaining number 7 times” in FIG. 33-1 (B), “total remaining number 10 times, second special figure remaining number 7 times” in FIG. 33-1 (E) When the total remaining number exceeds the second special figure remaining number, as shown in “Total remaining number 9 times, second special figure remaining number 6 times” in FIGS. As the remaining number of time saving, the second special figure remaining number such as “7 remaining” in FIGS. 33-1 (B) and (E) and “6 remaining” in FIGS. 33-1 (F) and (G). An image 96 of the remaining time saving time is displayed. On the other hand, when the total remaining number is less than the second special figure remaining number, as in “total remaining number 4 times, second special figure remaining number 5 times” in FIG. The total remaining number of times such as “remaining four times” in FIG.

  At the time of the production start of the time saving state, the state of the combination of the big hit symbols (“333” in this example) that triggered the start of the time saving state being stopped and displayed with the production symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly changing small symbol 90. It is displayed as an initial display image, and thereafter, the variable display of the time saving state according to the start winning is executed. The first variable display in the time saving state (first special symbol variation) is a symbol of the last variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (C), a swinging motion is performed on the spot, and immediately as shown in FIG. 33-1 (D), the variable display result of this time is derived and displayed. On the other hand, the second variable display (second special symbol variation) in the time saving state is, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (E), (G), and (H), the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 are scrolls of the time saving pattern. This is performed in a presentation mode in which the display (downward arrow in the drawing) is changed for 4 to 5 seconds to derive and display the variable display result.

  The average fluctuation time of the first variable display in the time saving state and the average fluctuation time of the second variable display in the time saving state are different from each other (first variable display> second variable display or first variable display). The display may be variable display <second variable display, or may be the same time (same time). Further, the first variable display in the time saving state may be a scroll display in a time saving pattern as in the second variable display.

  In the effect display device 9, variable display (any variable display mode such as symbol scrolling display, symbol switching display, etc.) is performed corresponding to each effect symbol 91, 92, 93, and effect symbols 91, 92. , 93 for deriving and displaying the display results corresponding to each of the left, middle, and right symbols, a constantly changing small symbol 90 composed of three small symbols is displayed. The constant variation small symbol 90 is variably displayed in a manner in which the symbol always fluctuates during the variation period of the special symbol, regardless of the display mode in which the effect symbol is displayed. By displaying such a constantly changing small symbol 90, for example, as shown in FIG. 33-1C, it is difficult to recognize whether the effect symbol displays 91, 92, 93 are changing. The display state of the constant variable small symbol 90 clearly shows that the variable display is being performed and the variable display result is clearly shown. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (I), when the variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 becomes the big hit display result, the display result of the constantly fluctuating small symbol 90 also becomes the big hit display result, which is called "big hit!". Such a jackpot notification image 99 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), in the time saving state, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed. Occasionally, as shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D, the time saving remaining number image 96 is temporarily erased during the variable display period (fluctuation time) of the first variable display (the portion indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure). ) After that, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (E), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed again without updating the display of the time saving remaining number at the start of execution of the next second variable display (second special symbol variation). By doing so, the display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of time reductions is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the remaining number is displayed. Since it is possible to perform display control so as not to display the number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving a feeling of strangeness to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-1C to 3E, when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, By deleting the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the deleted remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display, it is possible to perform display control so as not to display the remaining number of times. The display of the remaining number of times is erased and re-displayed to give an indication that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. Therefore, the remaining number of the variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is more uncomfortable for the player. Can be displayed without giving.

  Further, as described above, in the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining time saving number is The second special figure remaining number is displayed as. In the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

  FIG. 33-2 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the production control microcomputer 100 to execute the production display of the remaining number of time reductions shown in FIG. 33-1. FIG. 33-2 (A) shows a process (time saving remaining number display process A) for controlling the display of the remaining time saving number at the start of fluctuation, and FIG. 33-2 (B) shows the remaining time saving number at the time of fluctuation stop. Processing for controlling display (production symbol variation stop processing) is shown.

  The time saving remaining number display process A of FIG. 33-2 (A) is a process performed as a part of the process in the effect symbol variation start process (S801) of FIG.

  First, at the time of the variable display this time, it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the variable display (first variable display) of the first special symbol in the state in which the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state ( S911). In S911, it is determined whether or not the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state by checking whether or not the second special figure remaining number display flag set in S928, which will be described later, is set. . Then, in S911, it is determined whether it is the start time of the variable display of the first special symbol based on whether or not the first special symbol variation designation command of FIG. 7 is received.

  In S911, when it is not the start time of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, the process is ended. On the other hand, in S911, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, the time saving residual number image 96 is displayed during the current variation display. As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D), the time saving is the setting for executing the effect of temporarily erasing (the portion indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure) during the variable display period of the first variable display. The remaining number display is set to be erased (S912), and the process is ended. Next, the time saving remaining number is not displayed again by the time the execution of the second variable display (second special symbol variation) is started. The time saving remaining number display erasing setting in S912 is performed in addition to the effect of once erasing the time saving remaining number image 96, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (E). It may be a setting for executing the effect to be displayed.

  In this way, when the time saving remaining number display deletion setting is made, the second special figure remaining number is the time saving remaining number image 96 in the effect symbol variation process (S802) and the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) of FIG. When being displayed, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D, the effect of erasing the remaining time saving image 96 is produced. To be executed. On the other hand, in S911, when it is determined that it is not the time to start the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, S912 is not executed, so When the variation display of the second special symbol in the state where the 2 special figure remaining number is displayed, and when the variation display of the first different symbol in the state where the total remaining number is displayed in the time saving state or At the time of the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (E) to (H), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed.

  The production symbol variation stop process of FIG. 33-2 (B) is a process configured to be able to execute the display control of the remaining number of time reductions shown in FIG. 33-1 in the production symbol variation stop process of S803 of FIG. is there.

  In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (S921). If the stop symbol display flag is set, it moves to S932. On the other hand, if the stop symbol display flag is not set, for the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constant fluctuation small symbol 90, the predetermined stop symbol (departing symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) Is controlled to be stopped (S922).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol is a symbol for a big hit (that is, whether or not the big hit display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a big hit, the stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the symbol is not the big hit, it is confirmed whether or not the symbol is the small hit (that is, whether or not the small hit display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a small hit, the stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the symbol is not a small hit, that is, when the symbol is out of sync, it is the total number of remaining times of the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which is the first condition of the time saving end condition. Is confirmed (S925).

  The "total remaining number" is provided with a counting area for counting the total remaining number in the RAM 103, and when the jackpot gaming state is finished in the counting area, the first special symbol that differs depending on the type of jackpot as shown in FIG. The total number of times of fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is set as the initial value of the "total remaining number of times", and the first symbol fluctuation designation command transmitted when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, and the second When the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the second symbol variation designation commands transmitted when the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the calculation for subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. Such calculation of the “total remaining number” is executed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol variation stop process, for example, like the command analysis process (S704) in FIG. In S925, the "total remaining number of times" is confirmed by checking the data of the "total remaining number of times" calculated in this way.

  Next, the "second special figure remaining number", which is the remaining number of times only for the second special symbol variation, which is the second condition of the time saving end condition, is confirmed (S926). The "second special figure remaining number of times" is provided with a counting area for counting the second special figure remaining number of times in the RAM 103, and when the big hit game state is finished in the counting area, the kind of big hit as shown in FIG. The maximum value of the number of times only the second special symbol variation is the second condition of the time saving end condition which is different by is set as the initial value of the "second special symbol remaining number", and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the second symbol variation designation command transmitted to, the calculation for subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. The calculation of the "second special figure remaining number" is executed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol variation stop process, for example, like the command analysis process (S704) in FIG. In S926, the "second special figure remaining number" is confirmed by checking the data of the "second special figure remaining number" calculated in this way.

  Next, as the remaining number in the time saving state, it is confirmed whether or not the “total remaining number” confirmed in S925 is greater than or equal to the “second special figure remaining number” confirmed in S926 (S927). When the "total remaining number of times" is equal to or greater than the "second special figure remaining number of times" in S927, the second special figure remaining number of times confirmed in S926 is displayed on the time saving remaining number image 96 (S928), and the process proceeds to S930. Thereby, as in FIGS. 33-1 (B) and (F), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed at the second special figure remaining number which is the remaining number of the second special symbol variation. Further, in S928, the second special figure remaining number display flag indicating that the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state is set. On the other hand, when the “total remaining number of times” is less than the “second special figure remaining number of times” in S927, the total remaining number of times confirmed in S925 is displayed on the time saving remaining number image 96 (S929), and the process proceeds to S930. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (H), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as “total remaining number” which is the remaining number of the total number of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation. In S929, the total remaining number display flag indicating that the total remaining number is displayed in the time saving state is set. In S930, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S930), and the process ends.

  In addition, depending on whether it is determined in S921 that the stop symbol display flag is set, whether it is determined to be a big hit in S923, or small hit in S924, the stop symbol display flag is set in S931. Whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (one of jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag to jackpot start 5 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command has been received is set. Confirm (S932).

  If it is determined in S932 that the big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S934). Then, the preparatory setting for executing the big hit display for producing the fanfare for the big hit is made (S934). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (S804) (S935), and the process ends. As preparation settings for executing the big hit display, for example, selection of a process table for executing big hit display such as fanfare production corresponding to the big hit type, start of process timer, and effect display device 9 according to content of process data Start execution of control of the production device such as.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S932 that the big hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the small hit start designation command reception flag (first small hit start designation command reception flag -It is confirmed whether any of the third small hit start designation command reception flags is set (S936).

  If it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S937). Then, the preliminary setting for executing the small hit display for producing the fanfare for the small hit is made (S938). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (S808) (S939), and the process ends. As preparatory settings for executing the small hit display, for example, selection of a process table for executing the small hit display such as fanfare effects for small hits, start of a process timer, and an effect display device according to the contents of process data The execution of control of the production device such as 9 is started.

  Of the effect symbol variation stop processing, the processing of S924 to S929 and the like is executed, so that in the effect symbol variation stop processing, the display control of the time saving remaining number as shown in FIG. 33-1 is executed. You can

[Second display control example]
FIG. 33-3 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a second display control example of the number of remaining hours saved. In FIG. 33-3, similarly to FIG. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of an effect mode in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 15R time saving jackpot (see FIG. 2). Has been done. In FIG. 33-2, during the time saving state, as shown in (A) to (H), after variable display of effect symbols is executed a plurality of times, as in (I), as in FIG. 33-1. An example of control in which the jackpot display result is derived and displayed is shown in FIG.

  33-3 is different from FIG. 33-1 in that the following display control is executed. As shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), it is standard that the remaining time saving image 96 is displayed in red (the color of the remaining time saving image 96 is represented by the letters “(red)” in the figure). It is a color (normal color). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), in the time saving state, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the first variable display (first special symbol variation) Is executed, the color of the time saving remaining number image 96 is changed from the standard red color to the blue color during the variable display period of the first variable display as shown in FIGS. 33C and 33D. The display control microcomputer 100 executes the display control that changes to the special color and does not update the display of the remaining time saving number displayed in the remaining time saving image 96.

  As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D), the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 during the time saving state. In this case, since it is possible to perform display control without updating the display of the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving a feeling of strangeness to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, By changing and displaying the color of the time saving remaining number image 96, an effect is suggested that the display of the remaining number is not updated. Therefore, the remaining number of variable display executable during the time saving state is further increased. It can be displayed without giving a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, as described above, in the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining time saving number is The second special figure remaining number is displayed as. In the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

  FIG. 33-4 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute the effect display of the remaining time reduction number shown in FIG. 33-3. FIG. 33-4 (A) shows a process for controlling the hour / hour count display at the start of fluctuation (time-shortage remaining count display process B), and FIG. 33-4 (B) relates to the hour / hour count display at the time of fluctuation stop. A process for controlling (production symbol variation stop process) is shown.

  The time saving remaining number display processing B of FIG. 33-4 (A) is similar to the time saving remaining number display processing A of FIG. 33-2 (A), and a part of the effect symbol variation start processing (S801) of FIG. This is a process performed as a process.

  The process shown in FIG. 33-4 is different from the process shown in FIG. 33-2 in FIG. 33-4 (A), and FIG. 33-4 (B) is different from FIG. 33-2 (B). It is the same process. 33-4 (A) is different from the time saving remaining number display processing A of FIG. 33-2 (A) in S911, in which the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state. At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state of being displayed, during the variable display this time, the variable display of the first variable display as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D). Over the period, the time saving remaining number image 96 is changed from the red standard color to the special color of blue, and the display for the remaining time saving number displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated. This is to set a certain remaining time saving display update limit setting (S912A) and end the process.

  In this way, when the time saving remaining number display update limit setting is made, the second special figure remaining number as the time saving remaining number image 96 in the effect symbol variation process (S802) and the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) of FIG. When the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed when is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D, the time saving remaining number image 96 is the standard red color. An effect is executed in which the color is changed to a special color of blue and the display of the remaining time saving count displayed in the remaining time saving image 96 is not updated.

  In FIG. 33-4 (B), similarly to FIG. 33-2 (B), the processing such as S924 to S929 is executed, so that in the effect symbol variation stop processing, the time saving as shown in FIG. 33-3 is performed. Display control of the remaining number of times can be executed.

  In addition, in the first display control example of FIG. 33-1 and the second display control example of FIG. 33-3, the jackpot that triggers the start of the time saving state at the start of the performance of the time saving state (when the chance time enters). The state in which the combination of symbols (“333” in this example) is stopped and displayed with the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly fluctuating small symbol 90 is continuously displayed as the initial display image at the start of the effect in the time saving state, After that, when the first variable display is executed, the pattern of the previous variable display result sways on the spot, and the display result of this time is derived and displayed. However, not limited to this, at the time of the production start of the time saving state (when entering the chance time), it is not a combination of the big hit symbols that triggered the start of the time saving state, but always a stray symbol such as "123". The variable display in the time saving state may be executed after displaying the combination (so-called unevenness or the like).

  In general, when the effect design swings on the spot in the state of a combination of big hit symbols, the player misunderstands that the variable display result this time is displayed as the display result of the combination of big hit symbols. There are cases. Therefore, in order not to cause such a misunderstanding, it is only necessary to display the combination of the outlying symbols and then execute the variable display in the time saving state at the time of starting the production in the time saving state. By doing so, even when the first variable display is executed for the first time in the time saving state and the display result is the off display result, an effect of changing from the off display result to another off display result is performed. Therefore, when the first variable display is executed as the first variable display at the time of starting the production in the time saving state, the combination of the big hit symbols of, for example, "333" that is performing a swinging motion on the spot is suddenly changed to " It is possible not to give the player a feeling of strangeness that may be felt when changing to the combination of the outlying symbols of “334”.

  In addition, at the time of starting the production in the time saving state (when entering the chance time), the combination of the symbols of the big hits (“333” in this example) that triggered the start of the time saving state are the production symbols 91, 92, 93 and small fluctuations at all times. The state in which the symbol 90 is stopped and displayed is continuously displayed as an initial display image at the start of the production in the time saving state, and thereafter, the combination of the big hit symbols performs an oscillating action on the spot, resulting in a deviating display result. Even when the variable display is executed, the combination of the big hit symbols may be maintained and displayed as the current variable display result. In that case, since the effect symbol is only a symbol for effect, other effects of the effect display device 9 such as the fourth symbol which can indicate whether or not the effect symbol is being variably displayed. Depending on the specific symbol displayed in the area, in the execution of the first variable display, the effect symbol that is swaying is being variably displayed, and the effect symbol that is stopped is out of display and the jackpot display result. It suffices if it can indicate which of

[Example of control for updating the remaining time saving lock display]
Next, as in the second display control example, when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times in the time saving state for the second variable display is being displayed during the time saving state, the remaining time is displayed. In the case of performing display control that does not update the display of the number of times, as an example of superimposing and displaying a predetermined image indicating that the display of the number of remaining times in the time saving state is not updated on the image 96 of the remaining number of time saving, explain.

  FIG. 33-5 is an enlarged view of a display area in the vicinity of the time saving remaining number image 96 showing an example of the time saving remaining number update lock display control. For example, in the second display control example as shown in FIG. 33-3, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D). In addition, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the display of the remaining number of times in the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated. As illustrated in FIG. 33-5, in the example of the time saving remaining number update lock display control example, when the display of the remaining number of the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated, the display of the remaining number in the time saving state is not updated. As the predetermined image to be suggested, a lock image 96A having transparency and surrounding the periphery of the time reduction remaining count image 96 and capable of suggesting that the time reduction remaining count image 96 is not updated is superimposed on the time reduction remaining count image 96. Display control for displaying is performed. A part of the lock image 96A includes character information such as "LOCK" indicating that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. It should be noted that character information such as “LOCK” indicating that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated may not be included in the lock image 96A.

  Such superimposition display of the lock image 96A may be executed by setting the display in the time saving remaining number update limit display setting of S912A of FIG. 33-4 (A), for example.

  As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the time saving remaining number By performing display control for superimposing and displaying a predetermined image indicating that the remaining number is not updated on the image 96, such as the lock image 96A, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state is further increased. It can be displayed without giving a feeling of strangeness to the person.

  It should be noted that the image to be displayed on the remaining time saving image 96 may be an image with high transparency or an image with low transparency, and the remaining time display in the remaining time saving image 96 may be visually recognized to some extent. Anything is possible. Further, as an image to be superimposed and displayed on the remaining time saving image 96, it is possible to visually recognize that the remaining time saving image 96 itself is displayed, but the remaining number may be an image invisible. Further, the image to be superimposed and displayed on the remaining time saving image 96 may be either an image covering the remaining time saving image 96 or an image covering part of the remaining time saving image 96.

[First display control restriction example]
Next, in the first display control described above, that is, when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times in the time saving state for the second variable display is displayed during the time saving state, the remaining display is performed. A first display control restriction example will be described as a control for restricting the display control that does not display the number of times.

  As described above, when the remaining number of variable displays in the time saving state is displayed during the time saving state, at least the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is It has been described that when the number of remaining times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display, the remaining number of the total number of times is displayed as the remaining number of times.

  Therefore, when the remaining number of the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the first variable display When the display is executed, it is considered that the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable without performing the display control for not displaying the remaining number of times. Also, it is considered unnecessary to display the remaining number of times when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display is being displayed. To be As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays at least the total of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied when displaying the remaining number of the variable display in the time saving state during the time saving state. When the remaining number of times is less than the remaining number of second variable displays until the second condition is satisfied, even when the first variable display is executed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D). By controlling not to erase the remaining number of times in the short-time remaining number image 96, control for limiting the first display control is executed.

  In such a first display control restriction example, the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is equal to the remaining number of the second number of times until the second condition is satisfied. When it is less than, even if the first variable display is executed, display of the remaining number according to the game state is limited by limiting the effect of display control so as not to display the remaining number. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without further giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

[Specific notification example]
Next, a specific notification example that can be commonly executed for the above-described display control of the remaining number of variable displays executed during the time saving state will be described. The specific notification is, as described above, the end condition of the time saving state based on the end condition of the time saving state based on the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display and the end condition of the time saving state based on the number of times of the second variable display. When the number of times of the first variable display is increased, the situation becomes more disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation as much as possible, the first variable display is executed during the time saving state. This is a notification executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to specially accelerate the execution of the second variable display based on the number of times of the one variable display being equal to or greater than the specific number.

  FIG. 33-6 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a specific notification example. In FIG. 33-6, when the specific number of times is set to, for example, 4 times during the time saving state, and the first variable display that is less than the specific number of times such as 3 times is executed, FIG. ), The specific notification is not executed. On the other hand, when the first variable display is executed a specific number of times, such as four times, in the short state, as shown in FIG. The specific notification that strongly promotes the right-handedness is executed by the right-handed emphasized image 97A in which the arrow image is displayed much larger than the right-handed arrow image of the right-handed image 97 in the normal case of FIG. Further, as the specific notification, a sound different from the sound output when the normal right-handed image 97 is displayed (for example, a sound with a high volume, a sound such as a warning sound, or a sound that is not right-handed is disadvantageous to the player. Each of special voices such as voices indicating that the state is changed and combinations thereof are output. Further, as the specific notification, the light emitting mode of the light emitting bodies such as various lamps provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different from the light emitting mode of the normal right hitting image 97 (for example, light emission with a large light volume). , Special light emission modes such as light emission with different light emission colors, light emission with different blinking periods, and combinations) are performed.

  According to such a specific notification example, the specific notification is issued based on the number of times of the first variable display being equal to or greater than the specific number during the time saving state, whereby the first variable display and the second variable display can be performed. In the game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of times or the second variable display, the specific notification can prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state.

[Explanation on Characteristic Parts 068SH and 069SH]
Next, an embodiment relating to the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH of the present embodiment will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH, the notification regarding the variable winning ball device 15 will be described. In the description of the characteristic parts 068SH and 069SH, the pending storage information or the pending storage is also referred to as the pending information. The number of hold information is also referred to as the hold number. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the variable display is also referred to as a variable display.

  The characteristic unit 068SH detects when the number of pieces of pending information stored in the second pending storage buffer is the first number (0 to 3) and when it is the second number (4) that is larger than the first number. The notification mode is different. In addition, the feature unit 069SH, when the number of pieces of holding information stored in the second holding storage buffer reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces) of holding information that can be stored in the second holding storage buffer during a predetermined period, the upper limit number. It is characterized by executing arrival notification indicating that the arrival has been reached.

  First, the technical background of the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH will be described. The specifications and game methods of recent game machines have diversified, and it has been difficult for a player who has played with the game machine for many years to understand what specifications and game methods the game machine is playing. For example, something seems to be happening on the gaming machine, but I do not know what is happening, where to shoot the game ball, and whether there is no loss in shooting the game ball, etc. May feel uneasy. In particular, this tendency is remarkable in a special model called a one-and-two mixer.

  If the player does not know how to play the game, the player may suffer disadvantages or lose advantageous rights. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the notification by the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH can prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. Further, the state in which the player feels anxiety not only hinders the interest of the player from being improved, but also cannot fully sense the original characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the present embodiment, since such anxiety can be eliminated, the interest of the player can be improved, and the player can easily understand the features of the game machine, which further enhances the excitement of the player. You can In the conventional gaming machine, there is a case where a right-handed or a left-handed hit is reported, but this alone lacks specificity and cannot prevent a waste hit of a game ball. Hereinafter, the characteristic parts 068SH and 069SH will be described in detail.

  34-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 used in the description of the characteristic parts 068SH and 069SH, as seen from the front. A big difference between the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is that the variable display device is a drum-type pachinko gaming machine, and an LED indicating the number of reserved first special symbols and second special symbols. Is provided, and LEDs for instructing right-handed and left-handed are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 34-1, the variable display device 68SH009 of the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 has a plurality of revolving cylinders (hereinafter, also referred to as “reels”) to which a plurality of types of identification information (designs) are attached on the surface. However, a plurality of display areas in which a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by the rotation of the plurality of rotating drums are formed. Note that the design also includes a blank design. In the variable display device, reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, 68SH009R (hereinafter also referred to as "left reel", "middle reel", "right reel") are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. These reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, 68SH009R Three consecutive areas of the areas arranged in are arranged so that they can be seen through the see-through window. In the present embodiment, effective lines 68SHL1 (upper stage), 68SHL2 (middle stage), 68SHL3 (lower stage), 68SHL4 (downward right), 68SHL5 (upward right) shown in broken lines in FIG. When 7 are aligned, it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with a first pending storage indicator 68SH001 and a second pending storage indicator 68SH002, each of which is composed of four LEDs. Each LED lights up to indicate that the variable display that has not been started is suspended. In FIG. 34-1, the white circles indicate that they are not held, and the black circles indicate that they are held. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is shown that the reserved number is 0 for the first special symbol and the reserved number is 2 for the second special symbol.

  The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with hitting ball instruction arrow LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R. The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 lights the hitting ball pointing arrow LED 68SH005L when instructing the player to hit left, and lights the hitting ball pointing arrow LED 68SH005R when instructing the player to hit right. In FIG. 34-1, a state where the ball hitting arrow LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R are turned off is shown by a white arrow, and a state where they are turned on is shown by a black arrow. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is indicated that the right stroke is instructed. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with a board surface lamp 68SH015. The board surface lamp 68SH015 is a lamp that is provided on the back surface of the game board 6 and illuminates the game board 6 from the back side of the game board 6, and the emitted light passes through the game board 6. The board lamp 68SH015 also illuminates the area around the variable winning ball device 15. The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with an electric churn 68SH016. The electric Chu lamp 68SH016 is a lamp provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and is a lamp for making the variable winning ball device 15 stand out.

  The variable winning ball device 15 is a role as a variable winning ball device that changes between an open state and a closed state as described above. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 related to the characteristic parts 068SH and 069SH, the variable winning ball device 15 has a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is hard to win, and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the closed state. It can be changed to and. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided with a mark “M” as a mark. The mark "M" is used to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (voice notification: "Aim at M").

  FIG. 34-2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31 in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The difference from the main board (game control board) 31 shown in FIG. 3 is that the liquid crystal display device 9 is out of the configuration, and the reel motor 68SH010, the reel sensor 68SH012, the reel LED 68SH014, the hitting instruction arrow LEDs 68SH005L, 68SH005R, and the first reserved memory display. The device 68SH001 and the second hold storage indicator 68SH002 are included as a new configuration.

  The reel motor 68SH010 is controlled by a motor drive signal (stepping motor phase signal) output from the effect control board 80. The reel motor 68SH010 is provided corresponding to each of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel. The left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel are rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, so that three consecutive regions are displayed on the see-through window while being continuously changed for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. Then, by stopping the rotation of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel, three continuous regions are derived and displayed as the display result on the see-through window 3.

  The reel sensor 68SH012 is provided inside the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel, and detects the reference position for each of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel. The reel LED 68SH014 illuminates the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel from the back surface. The reel LED 68SH014 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive areas of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel, and each area can be independently illuminated.

  FIG. 34-3 is a diagram showing a symbol array of reels. On the reels, as symbols (identification information), red 7, blue 7, promotion notification symbol, and arrival notification symbol are drawn in a predetermined order so as to be distinguishable from each other. Among these, the red 7 and the blue 7 are sizes that fit within one area, but the promotion notification symbol and the arrival notification symbol are sizes that extend over three continuous areas.

  FIG. 34-4 (A) is a diagram showing a hit type table in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The main difference from the type table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds and a big hit without symbols are provided in the pattern big hit. In the present embodiment, as the types of big hits, there are big hits with symbol 5R time saving, big hits without pattern 5R time saving, big hits with small hit 11 (10) R time saving, and big hits with small hit 6 (5) R time saving. There is. The number in the parenthesis of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened. The jackpot determination value described in FIG. 5B is used for the determination of the jackpot with the symbol 5R time saving and the jackpot without the symbol 5R time saving. Therefore, the big hit probability of the symbol 5R time saving big hit in the present embodiment, and the big hit without pattern 5R time saving is 1/199. Similarly, the big hit judgment value described in FIG. 5B is used for the small hit judgment. Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1 / 7.35.

  The small hit via big hit in the present embodiment includes a small hit via 11 (10) R time-short and big hit, and a small hit via 6 (5) R time-short with big hit. On the other hand, in the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, there is a jackpot with the symbol 5R time shortening that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a jackpot without the symbol 5R time shortening.

  The symbol 5R with time saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 5 times (5R). The symbol 5R no time saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 5 times (5R). In the case of 11 (10) R hour / hour / big hit via the small hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 10 times (10R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device is opened for 11 rounds, but the number of big winning openings is practically 10 times, and the player is a big hit similar to the symbol 10R time junior big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel like a type. In case of 6 (5) R time saving via small hit, in the case of big hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) on condition of V winning. It's a big hit. Although the winning device for 6 rounds is opened, the number of times of opening the special winning opening is practically 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the special winning opening is the same kind of big hit type as the symbol 5R short-time big hit.

  The condition for ending the time saving state after the jackpot is the same as the condition described with reference to FIG. That is, as a condition for ending the time saving state after the big hit with the symbol 5R, there is an ending condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1, and the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Two conditions are set, including an end condition of 5 times. In this way, the number of times of the time saving end condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 is that the gaming balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. Has been set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is once, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, may generate a big hit via a small hit. There are times.

  There is a time saving state after a big hit with the symbol 5R time saving, the ending condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1, and the ending condition that the total number of the variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Is the same as the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit described in FIG. The reason is, like the one described in FIG. 2, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first start winning prize that can store up to four before the jackpot gaming state This is because even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information is started, the variable display for one time of the second special symbol that is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player can be surely executed. . By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, and in the time saving state, the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is likely to be determined. It can be prevented that the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed.

  Symbol 5R No time saving After a big hit, it shifts to a special normal state. The special normal state is a state in which only the effect performed by the effect control board 80 is different from the normal state. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player is the same as in the normal state. Further, the special normal state continues up to 30 fluctuations. In the following description, the three big hits of the symbol 5R with time saving and big hit, the small hit via 11 (10) R time with big hit, and the small hit via 6 (5) R time with big hit may be referred to as the time saving and big hit.

  34-4 (B) and 34 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 34-4 (B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 34-4 (C) is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type of the small hit via big hit when it is determined as the small hit by the second special symbol.

  In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (B), a numerical value that is compared with the value of Random 1 for jackpot type determination, "a big hit with a symbol 5R time saving" and "no symbol 5R time saving" The big hit judgment value corresponding to each of "big hit" is set. In the second special drawing jackpot type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 for jackpot type determination, "there is a symbol 5R time saving big hit" and "no symbol 5R time saving. The big hit judgment value corresponding to each of "big hit" is set. In the case of the present embodiment, "big hit with symbol 5R time saving" and "big hit without symbol 5R time saving" are each selected at 50%.

  34-4 (C), the small hit via big hit type determination table is a numerical value that is compared with the value of Random 2 for big hit type determination. The big hit judgment value corresponding to each of “6 (5) R time saving big hit with small hit” is set. However, the jackpot type determined by the small hit via jackpot type determination table is a temporary jackpot associated with each of 11 (10) R time-short and big hit and 6 (5) R time-short and big hit. It is a type and is invalid unless a V winning is generated in the small hitting game state. In the case of the present embodiment, “big hit with 11 (10) R time-shortening via small hit” and “big hit with 6 (5) R time-shortening via small hit” are selected at 50%.

  FIG. 34-5 is a diagram showing a transition of a game state. FIG. 34-5 shows a normal state, a special normal state, a big hit (symbol), a big hit (V winning), and a chance time as game states. First, in the normal state, if you win the "big hit with symbol 5R time saving" or "big hit without symbol 5R time saving", it shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. In the big hit (symbol) state, when the "big hit with symbol 5R time saving" ends, the time shifts to chance time A. On the other hand, in the big hit (symbol) state, when the "big hit without symbol 5R time saving" ends, the special normal state described above is entered.

  In the special normal state, when the player wins "big hit with symbol 5R time saving" or "big hit without symbol 5R time saving", it shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. In the special normal state, when the variable display is repeated 30 times, the normal state is entered.

  Chance time A is the condition described above after the end of the "big hit with symbol 5R time reduction", the ending condition that the variable display count of the second special symbol is 1, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol In this state, the total number of times continues until either one of the two conditions, that is, the ending condition of 5 is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time A, for the second special symbol, a maximum of 5 times, including one time saving and four fluctuations of the holding information of the second special symbol which is held up to four during the time saving. Fluctuation takes place.

  In the chance time A, by the variable display based on the hold information of the first special symbol, when the "big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction" or "big hit without symbol 5R time reduction" is won, the state shifts to the big hit (symbol) state again. At chance time A, a small win is won, and when a V win occurs, the game shifts to the big hit (via small hit) state. On the other hand, in the chance time A, when the small hit is not won or when the small hit is won but the V winning is not generated, the special normal state is entered.

  In the big hit (via small hit) state, in the big hit (symbol) state, when the "big hit with 11 (10) R time saving via big hit" or "6 (5) R time saving big hit with via small hit" ends, chance time Move to B.

  Chance time B is a variable display of the second special symbol, which is the above-mentioned condition after the completion of "a big hit with a small hit via 11 (10) R time saving big hit" or "a small hit via 6 (5) R time saving big hit" It is a state that continues until either one of the two conditions, that is, the ending condition that the number of times is 7 and the ending condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time B, for the second special symbol, a total of 7 times, and a maximum of 4 fluctuations of the holding information of the second special symbol, which is held up to 4 times during the time saving, a maximum of 11 times. Fluctuation takes place.

  In the chance time B, depending on the holding information of the first special symbol, if the "big hit with the symbol 5R time saving" or "big hit without the symbol 5R time saving" is won, it shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. At the chance time B, the small hit is won, and when the V winning is generated, the state is changed to the big hit (via the small hit) state again. On the other hand, in the chance time B, when the small hit is not won, or when the small hit is won but the V winning is not generated, the special normal state is entered.

  As shown in FIG. 34-5, in the present embodiment, after the advantageous state ends, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times equal to or more than the upper limit number (up to 5 times in the case of chance time A, and up to 11 times in the case of chance time B). If the advantageous state is controlled again by the time, the special state (chance time B) can be controlled after the advantageous state ends. With such a configuration, the special state is controlled every time the advantageous state is achieved, so that the player's feeling of excitement can be enhanced.

  34-6 and 34-7 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 in the present embodiment. Similar to FIGS. 7 and 8, FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7 show the relationship between specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the designated content of the command.

  In FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7, names and contents in 8C02 to 8C05, A001 to A004, A301 to A304, and C401, C402, C501, and C502 are shown in FIG. It is changed from FIG. Further, in FIG. 34-7, new commands of D101 to D104 are provided in order to specify that the special normal state is provided in the present embodiment and to open or close the operation port.

  FIG. 34-8 shows an example of the variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and the variable display is also performed. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the result is a “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display result is “miss” and the decorative pattern is A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern.

  The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α or super reach X is executed.

  FIG. 34-8 (A) shows a special figure 1 variation pattern which is a variation pattern of the first special symbol. FIG. 34-8 (B) shows a special figure 2 variation pattern which is a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, after the end of big hit with P1A1-2 big hit non-reach (loss), the design 5R time cut big hit, small hit via design 11 (10) R time cut big hit, and small hit via design 6 (5) After the jackpot with R time reduction, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first special based on the hold information of the first start winning prize that can be stored up to four before the jackpot gaming state It is a variation pattern when the design varies. As shown in FIG. 34-8 (A), the fluctuation time of P1A1-2 is 2000 ms (2 seconds).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, the time saving (loss) of P2A1-2 is the fluctuation pattern when the second special symbol which is executed first fluctuates after the end of the big hit with time saving. As shown in FIG. 34-8 (B), the fluctuation time of P2A1-2 is 60000 ms (60 seconds). As described above, the execution time (2 seconds) of the variable display that is executed based on the holding information of the first starting prize after the jackpot with the shortened time is executed based on the holding information of the second starting prize after the end of the advantageous state. Is shorter than the variable display execution time (60 seconds). It should be noted that, even during the time saving, after the end of the jackpot with the time saving, the variation pattern other than when the second special symbol executed first is a variation pattern other than P2A1-2.

  The fluctuating time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 is also the time for making the number of reservations four in the time saving state. The period changing in P2A1-2 is the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state, and the number of holdings stored by the second holding storage buffer is changed. It is an example of a predetermined period for making four. In one predetermined period, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state a plurality of times (three times in the present embodiment). That is, the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to be in the open state for the entire predetermined period.

  In this embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variable winning ball device 15 is informed that it is in the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “open state notification”). In addition, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit with time reduction, a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the variable winning ball device 15 is executed. FIG. 34-9 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the open state notification and the promotion notification. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9 (A), the promotion notification is executed by temporarily stopping the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel. This promotion notification is also an open state notification because it is not notified unless the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. The arrows drawn on the right reel and the left reel indicate that the reels are changing in the arrow direction. The middle reel is an example of a first movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100. In this way, by setting the notification mode to the temporary stop of the promotion notification symbol, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the jackpot with the shortened working hours, the number of holdings stored by the second holding storage buffer is the second holding storage. When the upper limit of four pieces of hold information that can be stored in the buffer is reached, arrival notification indicating that the upper limit is reached is executed. FIG. 34-9 (B) is a diagram showing an example of arrival notification. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9 (B), arrival notification is executed by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. The arrows drawn on the left reel and the middle reel indicate that the reels are changing in the arrow direction. The right reel is an example of a second movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  As shown in FIG. 34-9 described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the middle reel when the variable time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 is entered, and is stored in the second pending storage buffer. When the number of reserved pieces reaches 4, the right reel is stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to visually notify the player that the predetermined period has been reached and that the second number has been reached, by the movable body.

  In addition to the notification by the reel, the open state notification and the promotion notification include the above-described voice notification (“target M”). The voice notification is performed when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state for a predetermined period. Further, the open state notification and the promotion notification include a notification (hereinafter, also referred to as “promotion lamp notification”) for turning on the power tube lamp 68SH016 to make the variable winning ball device 15 stand out. Further, for the open state notification and the promotion notification, by turning off the panel lamp 68SH015 (hereinafter, also referred to as “panel turning off”), the light from the electric tube lamp 68SH016 is made relatively bright, so that the variable winning ball device 15 can be obtained. There is also a turn-off notification that makes the item stand out.

  Whether or not to execute these various notifications changes depending on the number of second special symbols reserved. Further, depending on whether or not a specific period (30 seconds, which is half of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the identification information, which is first executed after the jackpot with time reduction. Also changes. That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 has different notification modes depending on whether the number of holdings stored in the second holding storage buffer is 0 to 3, when the number of holdings is 4, and whether a specific period has elapsed. . Here, the different notification modes mean that in the case of the present embodiment, the combination of the voice notification, the prompt lamp notification, and the turn-off of the panel surface that are executed is different. Further, the specific period is a period for notifying the player that the remaining time in which the variable winning ball device 15 can start winning is short.

  FIG. 34-10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of holdings and the notification mode. FIG. 34-10 shows the execution conditions of the voice notification, the prompt lamp notification, and the turning off of the board. In FIG. 34-10, a circle indicates that it is executed, and a cross indicates that it is not executed. The voice notification is executed regardless of whether or not the specific period has elapsed when the number of reservations is 0 to 3, and is not executed when the number of reservations is 4. The promotion lamp notification is executed during the entire predetermined period. The turning off of the board surface is executed after the holding number is 0 to 3 and after the elapse of the specific period, and is not executed when the holding number is 4 or before the elapse of the specific period.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the notification mode differs depending on whether the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and when the number of holdings is 4. When the number of holdings is 0 to 3, the number of holdings has not reached 4, so at least a voice notification and a promotion lamp notification are provided to prompt the player to start winning the variable winning ball device 15. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  On the other hand, when the number of holdings reaches 4, it is not possible to increase the number of holdings more than this. Therefore, by performing only the promotion lamp notification, the player is compared with the notification mode when the number of holdings is 0 to 3 This is a notification mode that is difficult for others to recognize. As a result, the notification becomes easy to recognize and difficult to recognize, so that the player can more reliably recognize that the number of holdings has reached 4, and when the number of holdings is 4, the game medium is ejected. It can be made unconscious. In this case, the player can stop the emission of the game medium by, for example, releasing the ball from the hitting operation handle 5. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  Furthermore, when the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and a specific period has elapsed, all of the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the turning off of the board are performed, so that the player is more strongly in the open state and the variable winning ball device 15 It is possible to appeal to the winning of the game media to the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, the promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the variable winning ball device 15 is executed, and the number of the stored reservation information is further stored in the predetermined period. When the upper limit number of four pieces of hold information that can be stored in the second hold storage buffer is reached, arrival notification indicating that the upper limit number is reached is executed. According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. Specifically, the player can firmly enjoy the lottery with the second special symbol.

  Each notification and the like described above will be described using a timing chart. FIG. 34-11 is a timing chart showing the states of “voice notification”, “promotion lamp notification”, “board lamp”, “arrival effect”, “middle reel”, and “right reel” during time saving. Of these, the "arrival effect" is an effect in which arrival notification is performed by voice when the number of held items reaches four, but as will be described later, it may be notified in a specific mode different from the notification mode of arrival notification. is there. FIG. 34-11 shows a timing chart when the number of reserved first special symbols after a big hit is 0 as an example. Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol does not occur before the variation of the second special symbol. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 34-11, the number of reservations is three before the specific period has elapsed, and the number of reservations is four after the specific period has elapsed.

  As shown in FIG. 34-11, when the jackpot with time saving is finished and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is started by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above. In addition, in FIG. 34-11, it is simply drawn so that the variation starts immediately after the big hit ends, but in reality, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit after the big hit ends, and the variable winning ball device 15 is started. When a prize is won, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started by the fluctuation pattern of P2A1-2.

  At the start of the change, the voice notification and the promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is turned on, the middle reel is rotated to the promotion notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel is rotated. There is. In that state, the number of holdings becomes three before the specific period expires. The section A is from the start of fluctuation to the end of the specific period. When the specific period expires, since the number of holdings has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the panel lamp 68SH015.

  After that, when the number of holdings becomes four, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. The temporary stop of the arrival notification symbol is performed for 14 seconds. Therefore, 14 seconds after the arrival notification pattern is temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Further, when the number of holding is 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the reaching effect.

  After that, when the predetermined period of time has expired, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the notification of the promotion lamp and stops all reels. Next, aspects such as various notifications in the timing chart described in FIG. 34-11 will be described.

  FIG. 34-12 is a diagram showing a mode of the variable display device in the sections A and B and achievement effects, a mode of sound notification output from the speaker 27, a mode of the variable winning ball device 15 and the plate lamp 68SH015. FIG. 34-12 (A) is a diagram showing a mode of the variable display device, the voice notification, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 in the section A. As shown in FIG. 34-12 (A), in the variable display device, the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right reel and the left reel are rotating. “Aim for M!” Is output from the speaker 27 by the voice notification. Further, since the board lamp 68SH015 is turned on, the area around the variable winning ball device 15 is brightened by the board lamp 68SH015.

  FIG. 34-12 (B) is a diagram showing a mode of the variable display device, the voice notification, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 in the section B. As shown in FIG. 34-12 (B), in the variable display device, the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right reel and the left reel are rotating. “Aim for M!” Is output from the speaker 27 by the voice notification. Therefore, the variable display device and the voice notification are the same as those in the section A. The difference is that the panel lamp 68SH015 is turned off. By turning off the board lamp 68SH015, the area around the variable winning ball apparatus 15 becomes dark, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 becomes easier to recognize, and the player can be prompted to start winning the variable winning ball apparatus 15. it can. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of pieces of holding information has not reached four when the specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the specific period before the specific period elapses. The notification is performed in a notification mode that is easier to recognize than the notification mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  34-12 (C) and (D) are diagrams showing a mode of the variable display device, the voice, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 when the number of held balls is four. The reason why two figures are used is that a specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification when it is determined that the identification state is controlled to be variable by the variable display of the identification information executed first after the advantageous mode This is because it will be notified. Specifically, the output voice and the like are different depending on whether or not the first second special symbol after the jackpot with the time reduction is controlled by the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "holding sequence") and not. .

  34-12 (C) and (D) are common in that the arrival notification symbol of the right reel is temporarily stopped when the number of reserved pieces is four. Then, when there is no holding station, as shown in FIG. 34-12 (C), the speaker 27 notifies “arrival” as the arrival effect. The board lamp 68SH015 lights up in the same manner as in the section A. Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification pattern. With such a configuration, the interest can be improved by setting the notification mode to the temporary stop of the identification information.

  On the other hand, when there is a holding station, the speaker 27 notifies "Congratulations" as shown in FIG. 34-12 (D). Further, the panel lamp 68SH015 lights up in a rainbow color, which is different from the case of the section A. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled by the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the advantageous state, the effect control microcomputer 100 notifies the arrival notification. The notification is made in a specific mode (“Congratulations”) different from the notification mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within the predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to the advantageous state by the specific mode, so that the player's excitement It can enhance the feeling.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the advantageous state, in a specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification. Notify me. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within the predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to the advantageous state by the specific mode, so that the player's excitement It can enhance the feeling.

  The timing chart explained in FIG. 34-11 shows the timing chart in the case where the number of reserved first special symbols after the big hit is 0, but the number of reserved first special symbols after the big hit is 1 There may be a case where the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 or more. Therefore, there will be described a timing chart when the number of reserved first special symbols after the big hit is 1 or more and the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 after the big hit.

  FIG. 34-13 is a timing chart showing aspects of "voice notification", "right-handed voice notification", "promotion lamp notification", "board lamp", "arrival effect", "middle reel", and "right reel". is there. Of these, the new "right-handed voice notification" is a notification that outputs a voice such as "right-handed!" To instruct right-handed. In the example shown in FIG. 34-13, the number of reservations is 3 before the specific period has elapsed, and the number of reservations is 4 after the specific period has elapsed. As described above, in the present embodiment, during execution of the variable display that is executed based on the suspension information stored in the first suspension storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, another promotion notification different from the promotion notification (“right hit !)). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute another promotion notification according to the short variable display time.

  As shown in FIG. 34-13, when the big hit with time saving is over, the number of second special symbols reserved is 0 and the number of first special symbols reserved is 1 or more, so the variable display of the first special symbol is Be started. Along with the start of this variable display, the right-handed voice notification is started. On the other hand, while the first special symbol is fluctuating, the voice notification (“target M”) is not performed, but the promotion lamp notification is performed and the board lamp 68SH015 is lit.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display that is executed based on the hold information stored in the first hold storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, a right-handed voice notification different from the prompt notification by the voice notification is given. Run. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute another promotion notification according to the short variable display time.

  The display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit during the change of the first special symbol, and when the variable winning ball device 15 is started and won, the number of reserved second special symbols becomes one. When the variation of the first special symbol ends, the variation of the second special symbol that has been suspended by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 starts.

  At the start of the change, the voice notification and the promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is turned on, the middle reel is rotated to the promotion notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel is rotated. There is. In that state, the number of holdings becomes three before the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of holdings has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the panel lamp 68SH015.

  After that, when the number of holdings becomes four, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. When 14 seconds have elapsed since the arrival notification symbol was temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Further, when the number of holding is 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the reaching effect.

  After that, when the predetermined period of time has expired, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the notification of the promotion lamp and stops all reels.

  In this embodiment, a reel is used as the variable display device. The reel is rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, but if the reel motor 68SH010 is rotated or stopped within a short time, the reel motor 68SH010 may lose step due to delay or advance due to the moment of inertia of the load of the reel or the like. Therefore, in order to guarantee the stop operation time of the reel, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time (specific time) of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, the number of the hold information stored in the second hold storage buffer is When the number of arrivals reaches 4, the arrival notification is performed by voice without temporarily stopping the identification information.

  This is because the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped for 14 seconds, so that the reels can be rotated and stopped within a short time. For example, when the remaining time reaches 14.5 seconds and the number of holdings reaches 4, the rotation is started after the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped for 14 seconds, but the remaining time is 0. 5 seconds. Therefore, it is stopped 0.5 seconds after the rotation, and the rotation and the stop are performed within a short time.

  A timing chart in the case where the number of holdings reaches four with the remaining time of the predetermined period being 15 seconds or less will be described.

  FIG. 34-14 is a timing chart showing aspects of “voice notification”, “promotion lamp notification”, “board lamp”, “arrival effect”, “middle reel”, and “right reel”. In the example shown in FIG. 34-14, the number of reservations is three before the specific period has elapsed, the remaining time of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, and the number of reservations is four.

  As shown in FIG. 34-14, when the jackpot with time saving is finished and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is started by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above.

  At the start of the change, the voice notification and the promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is turned on, the middle reel is rotated to the promotion notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel is rotated. There is. In that state, the number of holdings becomes three before the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of holdings has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the panel lamp 68SH015.

  After that, when the number of holdings becomes four in the remaining 15 seconds or less, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, turns on the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 keeps the arrival notification symbol of the right reel rotated without temporarily stopping it, but performs the arrival effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time of the predetermined period is less than or equal to the specific time, the number of pieces of the hold information stored in the second hold storage buffer is equal to the number of hold information that can be stored in the second hold storage buffer. When the upper limit number of four is reached, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a voice arrival notification without temporarily stopping the identification information. According to such a configuration, arrival notification can be performed while ensuring the reel stop operation time.

  After that, when the predetermined period of time has expired, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the notification of the promotion lamp and stops all reels. According to such a configuration, arrival notification can be performed while ensuring the reel stop operation time.

  Next, a process for realizing the present embodiment described above will be described using a flowchart. In the present embodiment, in the main board 31, the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 9 and special symbol process processing in the timer interrupt processing, etc., and in the production control board 80, production control main processing and production control process processing of FIG. Processing similar to is performed. In the following, among the processes performed in the present embodiment, such as the special symbol stop process, the processes different from the above-described processes will be described using a flowchart.

  34-15 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the present embodiment.

  In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b. The control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer is When it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is ended. Further, the symbol confirmation designation command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, such as when it is determined that the big hit with the symbol 5R time saving or the big hit without the symbol 5R time saving is set, the CPU 56 is a time saving which is a flag that is set when the big hit is controlled. When the flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (S134), and when the special state flag is set, the special state flag is reset (68SH001), and the effect control microcomputer 100 determines. Depending on the type of the big hit, a process for transmitting either the big hit start 1 designation command or the big hit start 2 designation command (big hit start designation command) is performed (S135).

  As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of big hit is big hit without symbol 5R time saving, a big hit start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of big hit is a big hit with a symbol 5R, a big hit start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the jackpot type corresponds to is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time at which the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set to the special winning opening control timer (S136). After that, in the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the special winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the special winning opening is opened and the round is started.

  Further, according to the type of the big hit specified by the data showing the kind of big hit stored in the RAM 55, the opening pattern data for each kind of big hit stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times). ), Opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), and other data indicating the opening mode are set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Of such data, the release count data is set in the release count counter for counting the release count. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (S305) (S138), and the processing is ended. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special winning opening opening pre-processing.

  Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the small hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of times of opening including the setting of the small hit opening control timer used for the small hit opening control (for example, (5 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time between opening are set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening pretreatment.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state of the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set (S142). If the time saving flag is not set in S142, it means that the time saving state is not set, and therefore the routine proceeds to 68SHS005 described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, since it is a time saving state, for counting the total value of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The total time reduction counter as a counting unit is updated by subtracting -1 (S143).

  In the big hit end process of FIG. 14, the counter for subtracting and updating in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time saving state after having a 5R symbol time reduction and a big hit, and a 5R symbol time reduction with a big hit and 5R. When the second time saving state after a big hit of a type other than the symbol big time win is controlled, it is set to 11 times by S168, and by S143, the variable display which is the outlying display result is subtracted and updated every time it is executed. . The total time saving counter is used for both the determination of whether the ending condition of the first saving time condition is satisfied and the determination of whether the ending condition of the second saving time condition is satisfied.

  Next, based on checking whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end time of the variable display of the second special symbol (S145). In S145, when it is the end time of the variable display of the first special symbol, not the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, in S145, when it is the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by subtracting -1 (S146). The special figure 2 hour / hour counter that is subtracted and updated in S146 is a counting means for counting the variation display number of the second special symbol when it is controlled to the first hour / hour state or the second hour / hour state after the big hit game is over. In the jackpot ending process of FIG. 14, the special figure 2 time saving counter is set to 5 times by S165 when being controlled to the first time saving state and is set to 11 times by S168 when being controlled to the second time saving state. To be done. The special figure 2 hour reduction counter is subtracted and updated by S146 each time the variable display that is the display result of the second special symbol is lost is executed.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour count counter becomes "0", one of the ending conditions of the first hour / hour state is satisfied, or one of the ending conditions of the second hour / hour state is satisfied. Since it is time, the process proceeds to S149, which will be described later, in order to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state that is being executed. On the other hand, in S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour count counter is not “0”, it is to confirm whether or not another one of the ending conditions of the first hour / hour state is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to S148.

  In S148, based on the total variable display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state, in order to confirm whether the ending condition of the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed is satisfied First, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter updated and subtracted in S143 has become "0" (S148). In S148, when the count value of the total time saving counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S152 described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total hour / hour counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S149.

  S149, S150, in each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, when it is determined by S147 that the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached the number of end conditions, and by S148, the first special symbol and At any time, when it is determined that the total variable display number of the second special symbols has reached the number of end conditions, it is executed to end the first time saving state or second time saving state that is being executed. .

  In S149, the set time saving flag is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set hour / hour counter is reset (S150). Then, in response to the completion of the time saving condition based on the number of times of variable display in the time saving state, a process for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151).

  In 68SHS003, processing for transmitting a special normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is further performed (68SHS002). Then, the special normal flag indicating the special normal state is set (68SH003), the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special normal state is set to 30 (68SH004), and the process proceeds to S152.

  In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal process.

  If the time saving flag is not set in S142 described above, it is not the time saving state, so it is confirmed whether or not it is the special normal state (68SH005). If 68SH005 is not in the special normal state, the flow proceeds to S152. When 68SH005 is in the special normal state, the special state counter is updated by subtracting -1 (68SH006). In 68SH007, it is confirmed whether or not the special normal counter is 0 (68SH007). When the special normal counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S152. When the special normal counter is 0, a process for transmitting a special normal state end command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS008), and the process proceeds to S152.

  In such a special symbol stop process, by S142 to S151, when the first time saving state, the execution of the one-time variation display of the second special symbol and the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 When any one of the execution of the out-of-range variation display is satisfied, the process of ending the first time saving state is performed. Further, by S142 to S151, when in the second time saving state, the execution of the out-of-range variation display of the second special symbol 7 times, and the total of 11 out-of-range variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed. When either of the above is established, the process of ending the second time saving state is performed.

  34-16 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process in the present embodiment. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the special winning opening control timer set before the big hit ending process is executed (68SHS101). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit ending time has elapsed (68SHS102). If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if the time has passed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of the jackpot to be ended is the 5R time saving no jackpot based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 in the present jackpot gaming state. (68SHS103).

  When the type of the big hit to be finished is the 5R time saving big hit, a process for transmitting a special normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS104). Then, the special normal flag indicating the special normal state is set (68SHS105), the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special normal state is set to 30 (68SHS106), and the routine proceeds to 68SHS107.

  In 68SHS107, depending on the end of the big hit game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (68SHS107), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal process.

  If the type of big hit to be finished by 68SHS103 is not a big hit without symbol 5R time saving, it is confirmed whether the type of big hit to be ended is a big hit with symbol 5R time saving (S163). When the type of big hit to finish is a big hit with a symbol 5R time saving, in order to control to the first time saving state, as the ending condition of the first time saving state, "1" (2nd special symbol) in the special figure 2 time saving number counter (Variable display 1 time) corresponding data is set (S164), and the total hour reduction counter is set to "5" (first special symbol and second special symbol total variable display 5 times corresponding) data (S165). . Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

  When the type of jackpot that ends in S163 is not a jackpot with a symbol 5R time reduction, it is when the type of jackpot that ends is a jackpot type other than a jackpot with a symbol 5R time reduction and without a symbol 5R time reduction, and is controlled to the second time reduction state. In order to do so, as the ending condition of the second time saving state, the data of "7" (corresponding to one variation display of the second special symbol) is set in the special figure 2 time saving number counter (S167), and the total time saving number counter is " 11 "(corresponding to a total variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 11 times) is set (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

  In S170, the time saving flag is set in order to control the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S170). When controlling to the first time saving state, the first time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second time saving state, the second time saving flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to 68SHS107.

  Thereby, after the jackpot game state of the symbol 5R time reduction big hit is controlled to the first time saving state, after the jackpot type big hit game state other than the symbol 5R time shortening big hit and the symbol 5R time saving big hit is controlled to the second hour saving state To be done. Then, the respective end conditions of the first time saving state and the second time saving state are individually defined by the number of times of fluctuation display only of the second special symbol and the total number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It

  In such a jackpot end process, by S164, S165, after the jackpot gaming state of the big hit with the symbol 5R time saving, the execution of the one-off variation display of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The setting for controlling to the first time saving state is set until any one of the execution of the deviation variation display of a total of 5 times of the symbol is established. Further, by S167, S168, after the jackpot game state of the jackpot type other than the symbol 5R hour short and big hit and the symbol 5R hour short no big hit, after execution of the second special symbol seven times variation display, the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is set to control to the second time saving state until either one of execution of the total of 11 out-of-range variation display of the two special symbols is established.

  Next, in the case of controlling the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state, a process of transmitting control information (operating port opening command) indicating control in the open state to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 34-17 is a flowchart showing the time saving first variation process for transmitting the operation opening command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The time saving first variation process in FIG. 34-17 is included in the special symbol variation process (S303 in FIG. 10).

  In the time saving first variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it is the opening timing for opening the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS201). At the opening timing of the operation opening, an operation opening opening command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS202), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS203), and the process ends.

  When it is not the opening timing of the operation opening in the 68SHS201, the CPU 56 confirms whether it is the closing timing of the operation opening for closing the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS204). At the operation port closing timing, an operation port closing command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS205), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS206), and the process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state over a plurality of times in one predetermined period, and in the case of controlling the open state, it is controlled to be in the open state. The control information is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 34-17 is a flowchart showing the small hit ending process (S310) in the present embodiment. In the small hit completion post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning effective period timer by -1 (S441), and confirms whether the V winning effective period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

  When the V winning effective period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is determined in order to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. It is determined whether or not is on (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, the V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and the V winning flag indicating that the V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, the processing for transmitting the V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the processing is ended. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

  When the V winning effective period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening / closing member to return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big hit, and the big hit flag is set (S449).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hitting game state, if the player makes a right hit in accordance with a right hit promotion notification described later, the game ball will enter the V determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. Based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 always wins the V prize in the V winning area 870, the V winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the big hit flag is set in S449, and the big hit game state is controlled.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines that the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer in S81 is legally a big hit due to the occurrence of the V winning, and the data is changed to the big hit type buffer. Officially memorize (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is temporarily reset (S451), and the special normal flag is reset (68SH304).

  Next, the CPU 56 transmits a big hit start 3 designation command or a big hit start 4 designation command according to the big hit type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the big hit gaming state starts. Next, the special winning opening control timer is set to a value corresponding to the big hit display time (S453).

  Further, referring to the big hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times or 5 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time (round) are referred to according to the kind of big hit. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as a special winning opening closing time) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the release count data is set in the release count counter for counting the release count in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (S305) (S455), and the processing is ended. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state, the game goes to the big hitting game state.

  If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot gaming state does not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via the jackpot stored in the jackpot temporary type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special normal state designation command is issued. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS301). Then, the special normal flag indicating that it is in the special normal state is set (68SHS302), the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times in the special normal state is set to 30 (68SHS303), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value is updated to the value corresponding to the normal process (S300) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when the V winning is not generated in the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state is not shifted.

  Next, processing on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. 34-19 is a flowchart of the time saving / time variation process. The time saving time variation process of FIG. 34-19 is included in the effect symbol variation process (S802 of FIG. 19). Further, the time saving time variation processing indicates processing during variable display of the first second special symbol after the big hit with time saving.

  In the time saving / time variation process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the fourth reserved game has won the start prize (68SHS401). This can be confirmed by the second reserved storage number designation command. When the fourth reserved item has won the start prize, the provisionally stopped middle reel is started to rotate (68SHS402). Next, it is confirmed whether the remaining time is less than or equal to the specific time (68SHS403). When the remaining time is less than or equal to the specific time, the process proceeds to 68SHS405. When the remaining time is not less than the specific time, the arrival notification symbol of the right reel is temporarily stopped (68SHS404).

  The production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not there is a holding station (68SHS405). Whether or not there is a pending string can be confirmed by the command C2XX. When there is a holding string, "Congratulations" is output from the speaker 27, and the process is ended. When there is no holding station, "arrival" is output from the speaker 27, and the process ends.

  In the 68SHS401, when the fourth hold is not the winning a prize, it is confirmed whether or not a specific period has passed (68SHS408). When the specific period has elapsed, it is confirmed whether the number of holdings is less than 4 (68SHS409). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4, the panel lamp 68SH015 is turned off (68SHS410), and the process is ended.

  In the 68SHS408, when the specific period has not elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the operation opening command has been received (68SHS411). If the operation opening command has not been received, the processing ends. When the operation opening command is received, it is confirmed whether the number of holdings is less than 4 (68SHS412). If the number of reservations is not less than four, the process ends. When the number of held items is less than 4, voice notification is performed (68SHS413), and the process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, by receiving the operation opening opening command, it is notified that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. With such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 can reliably perform the notification by the operation opening opening command transmitted from the CPU 56 that controls the variable winning device.

  [Main effects of feature 069SH]

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays identification information based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result.
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces, etc.) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. Arrival notification means for executing notification (outputting "arrival", etc.) (production control microcomputer 100, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by having.

  According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
After the advantageous state ends, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 11 times, etc.) that is equal to or more than the upper limit number, the advantageous state is re-established. (5) When controlled to a R jackpot and a big hit etc., it is possible to control to a special state (chance time B etc.) after the end of the advantageous state.

(3) Means 1 The gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The promotion notification means executes the promotion notification by temporarily stopping the identification information (promotion notification pattern or the like).

  With such a configuration, the interest can be improved by setting the notification mode to the temporary stop of the identification information.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
When the game medium wins, another winning device (first start winning port 13 or the like) that can start variable display on the variable display device,
Other holding storage means (first holding storage buffer or the like) that stores holding information for variable displays that have not been started yet among the variable displays that can be started by winning the game medium in the other winning device. When,
The execution time (2000 ms, etc.) of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the other hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state is based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state. It is shorter than the execution time of variable display (60000 ms etc.),
While the variable display is being executed based on the suspension information stored in the other suspension storage unit after the end of the advantageous state, the promotion notification unit is another promotion notification different from the promotion notification (“right hit”). Output).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute another promotion notification according to the short variable display time.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
The predetermined period is a period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state.

(6) The gaming machine according to (5),
When it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the advantageous state (when the hold sequence is determined), the arrival notification unit is configured to notify the arrival notification. The notification is made in a specific mode different from the notification mode (such as outputting "Congratulations").

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within the predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to the advantageous state by the specific mode, so that the player's excitement It can enhance the feeling.

(7) The gaming machine according to (5),
The arrival notification means executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the identification information (arrival notification pattern or the like).

  With such a configuration, the interest can be improved by setting the notification mode to the temporary stop of the identification information.

  Regarding the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) that shifts to a big-hit gaming state based on a variable display result of special symbols and effect symbols, and a variable winning ball device provided in a gaming area. Combined with a gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in (so-called accessory) Although the gaming machine (so-called one-and-two-type mixing machine) has been described, it may be applied to a first-type gaming machine.

  Specifically, since the first-type gaming machine has a hold, by applying the characteristic part 068SH, when the number of stored hold information is the first number (0 to 3), By setting the notification mode to be different from the case of the second number (4) that is larger than the first number and applying the characteristic part 069SH, the number of stored hold information is set to the second number in the predetermined period. When the upper limit number (4) of the hold information that can be stored in the hold storage buffer is reached, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit number is reached is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the hold information is set to four, but it may be another number such as eight.

  In the present embodiment, a sound such as “arrival” is output as the arrival notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrival notification may be a minute sound that is output when the game control board transmits a command and the effect control board receives the command.

  In the present embodiment, the reels are used as the first movable body and the second movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first movable body and the second movable body may be an accessory. As the character of the first movable body, for example, a character that appears when a predetermined period of time has passed may be used, and as a character of the second movable body, for example, a character that appears when the second number is reached. May be used. In any case, since notification can be made by using the movable body, variations in notification can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, 1 minute is used as the predetermined period, 30 seconds is used as the specific period, and 15 seconds is used as the specific time, but the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined period, the specific period, and the specific time may be appropriately determined for each model (for example, the number of times and the time when the variable winning device is opened).

  In this embodiment, the variable display device is a drum type using a reel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display device using liquid crystal, organic EL, project mapping, or the like may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 is promoted and the arrival is notified has been described. However, the closed state in which the game medium cannot win or the prize is hard to win, and the game medium wins more than the closed state. It is not limited to the variable winning device that can be changed to the open state that is easy to perform, and may be a winning ball device that can always win, such as the first starting winning opening 13. In this case, the notification means, when the variable winning device is in the open state, instead of the notification means for notifying that the variable winning device is in the open state, also as a notification means for notifying the winning to the winning device Good. Even in this case, it is possible to notify the player of winning the prize, and the player can recognize that the player can clearly aim the winning ball device by the notification, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. This makes it possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

  In the present embodiment, the notification mode is made different between when the number is the first number and when the number is the second number which is larger than the first number, but the notification mode is different (for example, stepwise) depending on the number of pending calls. You may do it. That is, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 1, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 2, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 3, and the notification mode when the number of reservations is 4 may be different from each other. Even in this case, since it is possible to notify the player of winning the prize, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to do.

  In the present embodiment, the notification mode differs depending on the combination of the voice, the lamp, and the reel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notification mode may be different for each of the lamp, the voice, and the reel by changing the color of the lamp, changing the sound, changing the movement of the reel, and the like. Even in this case, since it is possible to notify the player of winning the prize, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to do. Further, the remaining time in the predetermined period may be displayed digitally or by a bar.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to deal with a gaming machine with diversified specifications and gaming methods, in the notification of only right-handed or left-handed, which is performed in the conventional gaming machine, It is possible to solve the problem that it is difficult to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period. This not only makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within the predetermined period, but also only the player who has been playing the game in the past. Not only that, even beginners can easily enjoy the game, so that the effect of promoting the increase of the game population can be obtained.

[Main effects regarding the characteristic portions 244F and 245F]
(1) As shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D, when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed during the time saving state, Since it is possible to perform display control so as not to display the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 33C and 33D, when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, Since it is possible to perform display control without updating the display of the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving a feeling of strangeness to the player.

  (3) As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) to (E), when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, It is possible to perform display control so that the remaining number of times is not displayed by deleting the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the deleted remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display. As a result, the effect of suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated by erasing and re-displaying the remaining number of displaying is performed, and thus the remaining number of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state can be further improved to the player. It can be displayed without giving a feeling of strangeness.

  (4) As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, By changing and displaying the color of the time saving remaining number image 96, an effect is suggested that the display of the remaining number is not updated, so that the remaining number of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further improved. It can be displayed without giving a feeling of strangeness to the person.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, By performing display control for superimposing and displaying a predetermined image, such as the lock image 96A, indicating that the remaining count is not updated on the short-term remaining count image 96, the remaining count of the variable display that can be executed during the time-saving state is changed. It can be displayed further without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  (6) (B) to (G) of FIG. 33-1, S927 and S928 of FIG. 33-2 (B), (B) to (G) of FIG. 33-3, and FIG. As shown in S927 and S928 of (B), at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving The second special figure remaining number is displayed as the number of times. Then, in the time saving state, (H) of FIG. 33-1, S927, S929 of FIG. 33-2 (B), (H) of FIG. 33-2, S927, S929 of FIG. 33-4 (B), etc. As shown, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. The remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

  (7) As shown in [First display control restriction example], the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the number of times until the second condition is satisfied. When the number of remaining times is less than two, even if the first variable display is executed, the display control is restricted so as not to display the remaining number of times. Since the remaining number of times is displayed, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  (8) As shown in [Specific Notification Example] shown in FIG. 33-6, the specific notification is given based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display during the time saving state is equal to or greater than the specific number, and thus the first notification In the game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of the variable display and the second variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state by the specific notification.

  (9) By executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29 or the like, as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, the change effect is executed according to the number of pieces of pending storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the performance mode of the specific performance, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game due to the fun of the performance.

[Main Modifications Regarding Characteristic Parts 244F / 245F]
(1) Regarding the above-described first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the time saving remaining number is not displayed. As an example of display control to be performed, (a) display control for changing the time saving remaining number image 96 to another image such as a character image so as not to display the time saving remaining number, or (b) Other display control such as display control for not displaying the remaining time saving number may be performed by displaying the remaining time saving image 96 so as to be covered with another image such as a character image.

  (2) Regarding the above-described second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the remaining time saving number is not updated. As an example of display control, (a) the time saving remaining count image 96 is temporarily changed to another image such as a character image, and the time saving remaining count image 96 that has not been updated is redisplayed to update the display of the time saving remaining count. No display control, (b) display control of not updating the display of the remaining time saving number 96 by returning to the original display by once attempting to subtract and update the remaining time saving image 96, and (c) displaying the image of the remaining time saving image 96. Display control that does not update by suggesting not to update by changing the size (for example, changing to an extremely small image), or (d) a message indicating that the time saving remaining count is not updated near the image of the time saving remaining count image 96. It may be other display control of the display control or the like not update the suggested not to renew by displaying over di.

  (3) In the above-described first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the time saving remaining number is deleted. As the control, (a) the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied is the second number until the second condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. When the remaining number of variable displays exceeds the remaining number of time saving, the display of the remaining number of time saving is erased, and the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second condition of the end of the time saving state. When the number of remaining times of the second variable display is less than, the control for not erasing the display of the remaining number of time reductions, or (b) the first variable display until the first condition for ending the time reduction state is satisfied. And the remaining number of the total number of second variable display is hour When the remaining number of second variable displays until the second condition for ending the state is exceeded is exceeded, the remaining number of the total number of first variable display and second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the time saving state end. The control for erasing the display of the time saving remaining number may be executed both when the second variable display remaining number is less than the remaining number until the second condition is satisfied.

  (4) In the first display control and the second display control, at least the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of the second variable display is exceeded, the remaining number of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of the variable display during the time saving state, and at least the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied. And a display control for displaying the remaining number of the total number of times as the remaining number when the remaining number of the total number of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied. May perform the following display control. When the total number of remaining times exceeds the remaining number of second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, and when the total number of remaining times is less than the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied. Thus, the display mode of the time saving remaining number image 96 may be different. In that case, different display modes include different display positions, different display colors, different display sizes, and different display shapes (fonts, etc.). Is included.

  (5) As the specific notification example described above, the following control may be performed in addition to the control described above, or may be performed together with the control described above. In the time saving state, a special image such as a special character image is displayed based on that the number of times of the first variable display executed is equal to or greater than a specific number, and the player is informed that the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Control (indicate). An image of a wide display area that is equal to or larger than a predetermined range of the display area of the effect display device 9, such as changing the background image based on the number of times the first variable display is executed being equal to or greater than the specific number in the time saving state. By changing, the control is performed to notify (suggest) that the situation is disadvantageous to the player. In the time saving state, based on the number of times of the first variable display being executed being equal to or greater than a specific number, a control is performed by directly displaying a message indicating that the situation is disadvantageous to the player. do.

  (6) For the time saving remaining number image 96, an image capable of specifying whether "total remaining number" or "second special figure remaining number" is displayed is displayed as follows. Good. (A) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, the image color may be different when the “total remaining number” is displayed and when the “second special figure remaining number” is displayed. (B) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, the size of the image may be different when the “total remaining number” is displayed and when the “second special figure remaining number” is displayed. . (C) As for the time saving remaining number image 96, the shape of the image (character font, character) is displayed when the “total remaining number” is displayed and when the “second special figure remaining number” is displayed. Thickness, character color, etc.) may be different. (D) For the time saving remaining number image 96, a message indicating which of the “total remaining number” and the “second special figure remaining number” may be displayed may be directly displayed.

  (7) With regard to the time saving remaining number image 96, at least the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second number until the second condition is satisfied. In addition to when the remaining number of variable displays is exceeded, at least the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied. Even when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is less than, the second remaining number of special figures may be displayed as the time saving remaining number.

  (8) For the time saving remaining count image 96, the total remaining count that is the total count of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied, and the second count until the second condition is satisfied. Both the second special figure remaining number, which is the number of times of variable display, may be displayed in parallel.

  (9) Regarding [specific notification example], a predetermined specific number of times, such as four times, is set during the time saving state, and the specific notification is executed when the first variable display of the specific number of times is executed. An example was given. However, not limited to this, the specific number of times set as the execution condition of the specific notification sets the number of reserved storages (0 to 4) 9 of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state, and the number of reserved storages After the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the specific notification may be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is further executed.

  (10) In the above-described first display control and second display control, an example has been shown in which the display of the remaining number of time reductions can be updated at the end of variable display in the time reduction state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed so that the display of the remaining number of time reductions can be updated at the start of variable display in the time reduction state.

[Other means configuration example 1]
The above-described embodiment includes the following means configurations.

(1) Variable display (variable display of special symbols, effect symbols, etc.) is performed, and a gaming machine (pachinko game) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (large jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 opens) Machine 1 etc.),
Hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) that stores information regarding variable display as hold storage information,
Specific effect execution means (specific control microcomputer 100, S881 to S896 in FIG. 31, S901 to S906 in FIG. 32, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect in FIG. 29, etc.),
Change effect execution means (micro controller for effect control) capable of executing a change effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect (first reserved change effect to reserved fourth change effect in FIGS. 29D to 29G). Computer 100, FIGS. 29D to 29G, and S889 of FIG. 31),
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect in response to the variable display being executed in a specific variation pattern (variation pattern of the second special symbol for the first time after the end of the game state of the symbol 4R hour short and big hit). (S881 in FIGS. 30 and 31),
The change effect executing means executes the change effect in accordance with the number of pieces of pending storage information when the specific effect is executed (FIGS. 29D to 29G, S889 in FIG. 31, and the like).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game due to the fun of the production.
(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When the variable display is executed in the specific variation pattern, a promotion effect that promotes the storage of the pending storage information in the pending storage means (the winning of "store pending!" In FIGS. 29B to 29G). Further provided is a promotion effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 100, S886 in FIG. 31, etc.) for executing a winning promotion effect for displaying the promotion image 9B.
The change effect executing means executes the change effect in association with the increase in the number of pieces of pending storage information (FIGS. 29D to 29G, S889 in FIG. 31, and the like).

  With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize the relationship between the change effect and the number of pieces of pending storage information.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The change effect execution means, when executing the change effect, performs a reach line number increase effect that increases the number of lines in the reach mode formed in association with the execution of the specific effect (FIG. 29 (D)- (G) Reach line increase effect of increasing the number of reach lines by the look-ahead effect design 94 according to the increase of the second reserved storage information number).

  With such a configuration, the relationship between the change effect and the number of pieces of pending storage information can be made visually easy to understand.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The change effect execution means increases the number of lines in the same reach mode in the reach line number increase effect (the same “7” according to the increase in the number of held storage information as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G). Increase the number of reach lines of the pattern etc.).

According to such a configuration, development design of production control can be facilitated.
(5) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
During the reach line increase effect, a suggestion effect indicating whether or not the advantageous state is achieved (displaying the display result of the reach line pattern corresponding to each of the held storage information in FIGS. 29H to 29J). Further, a suggestion effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 100, S893 in FIG. 31 and the like) for executing a suggestion effect or the like that suggests whether or not to be on hold is provided,
The suggestive effect is executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of lines in the reach mode (the suggestive effect period in FIG. 30, S893 to S895, etc. in FIG. 31).

According to such a configuration, development design of production control can be facilitated.
(6) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The promotion effect executing means ends the promotion effect when the number of pieces of reserved storage information reaches a predetermined value (FIGS. 29G and 29H, S890 and S891 in FIG. 31).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the effect by suppressing an unnecessary effect.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of pieces of pending storage information by an effect using a series of images (effects of the determination effect moving images in FIGS. 29A to 29O). 29 (A) to (O), 883 in FIG. 31, S906 in FIG. 32, etc.).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by producing a series of images.

[Other means configuration example 2]
The above-described embodiment further includes the following means configuration.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state or the like) that is advantageous to the player,
A variable winning means that allows the game medium to enter in a predetermined state (V determination winning device 87 or the like),
A specific area (V winning area 870 or the like) provided in the variable winning means and into which a game medium can enter,
First state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S305 to S307, etc. in FIG. 10) for controlling to an advantageous state (symbol big hit, etc.) based on the variation display result,
Based on the variation display result, the game medium is controlled to the predetermined state so that the game medium can enter the specific area in the variable winning means (V prize etc.) (small hit state etc.), and the identification is performed in the predetermined state. Second state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S308 to S310 in FIG. 10, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10) for controlling to the advantageous state (small hit, big hit, etc.) based on the entry of the game medium into the area. Etc.),
A predetermined effect means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (an effect for displaying the V winning aura image 95 as the number-of-rounds suggestion effect of FIG. 20) based on the game medium having entered the specific area in the predetermined state. Microcomputer 100, S842 to S844, etc. of FIG. 26),
In the predetermined state, a predetermined period (0.1 second × 10 times of opening and 1 second of repeated closing period, etc.) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (10 pieces etc.) of game media is stored in the variable winning means. Ends based on the entry,
After the game medium enters the specific area, the predetermined effect means changes the effect mode of the predetermined effect according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means (as in FIG. 24, a small hit). The color of the V winning aura image 95 changes in the round number suggesting effect of FIG. 20 according to the number of winning prizes (1 to 10, etc.) to the V determination winning device 87 in the game state).

  According to such a configuration, after the game medium enters the specific area, the presentation mode of the predetermined effect can be changed according to the number of the game media entered in the variable winning means, so that the interest of the game is improved by the effect. be able to.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When a game medium enters the specific area in the predetermined state, an entry notification effect means (small prize notification in FIG. 20) for notifying that the game medium has entered the specific area (small prize notification in FIG. 20 and the like) (small) In the process of opening in S808 of FIG. 19 in the winning effect, a process of displaying the V winning image 94 of FIG.
The predetermined effect means executes the predetermined effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (such as displaying the V winning aura image 95 when the V winning image 94 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 20). ).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is executed in association with the execution of the entry notification effect for informing that the game medium has entered the specific area, so that the interest of the game is further improved by the effect. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means (FIG. 20 (A) to (E), V as shown in FIG. 23 (A)). (The winning aura image 95 can be changed in steps of white → blue → green → red → rainbow depending on the number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87.)

  According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means, so the effect mode of the predetermined effect and the game that has entered the variable winning means The player can be focused on the number of media.

(4) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The advantageous state is selected from a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage (a plurality of types of winning types in FIG. 2, etc.),
The presentation mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage of the advantageous state that is controlled based on the game medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state (FIG. 23 (B)). As described above, selection ratios of a plurality of types of effect patterns having different stepwise changes in color of the V winning aura image 95 are different according to the determined number of rounds for the jackpot).

  According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise in accordance with the degree of advantage of the advantageous state that is controlled based on the game medium entering the specific region in the predetermined state. Since the player can recognize the degree of advantage of the advantageous state that is controlled based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific area, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) that stores information regarding variable display as hold storage information,
Further provided is a pre-reading determination means (game control microcomputer 560, S1215, S1225, etc. in FIG. 11) for determining whether or not the variable display which has not been started is controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined effect means is capable of changing the effect mode of the predetermined effect to a specific mode based on the fact that the hold memory means includes the hold memory information in the advantageous state ([V winning image aura color. Modified example of performing the continuous notification notification by])).

  According to such a configuration, the presentation mode of the predetermined effect can be changed to the specific mode based on the fact that the hold storage means includes the hold storage information that is in the advantageous state. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the pending storage information that is to be included is included, so that the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

Next, other effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) By executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29 or the like, as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, the change effect is executed according to the number of pieces of pending storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the performance mode of the specific performance, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game due to the fun of the performance.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, a change effect is executed in association with an increase in the number of held storage information due to a winning promotion effect, so that a change in the specific effect. It is possible for the player to clearly recognize the relationship between the effect and the number of pieces of information stored on hold.

  (3) As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, as a change effect in the specific effect, a reach line increase effect that increases the number of reach lines in accordance with an increase in the number of second hold storage information is executed. As a result, the relationship between the change effect and the number of pieces of the second pending storage information can be made visually easy to understand.

  (4) As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, as a change effect in the specific effect, the reach mode is increased by increasing the number of reach lines of the same “7” symbol according to the increase in the number of held storage information. It is not necessary to consider the production pattern relating to the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player, such as changing the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player according to the type of .

  (5) As shown in FIG. 30, the suggestion production period can be executed in the same production period regardless of the number of reach lines, so that the development control of production control can be facilitated.

  (6) As shown in FIGS. 29 (G) and (H), the prize winning promotion effect is finished when the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), thereby promoting more than necessary. By suppressing the effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the effect.

  (7) As shown in FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O), by performing a specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of pieces of pending storage information by an effect using a series of images such as a determination effect moving image, The interest of the game can be improved by the production.

  (8) By executing the round number suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 20, after the game medium has entered the specific area, the V winning aura image 95 is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87. Since the effect mode of a predetermined effect such as the effect of displaying is changed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect without delaying the progress of the game.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 20, since the number-of-rounds suggestion effect by the V winning aura image 95 is executed in association with the fact that the V winning image is displayed, the effect of notifying the V winning is executed. The interest of the game can be further improved.

  (10) As shown in FIG. 20, the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting production by the V winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning apparatus 87. The player can be made to pay attention to the round number suggesting effect and the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 23, the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting production by the V winning aura image 95 is controlled based on the V winning in the small hitting gaming state. Since the number of rounds of the jackpot can be recognized by the player, the interest of the game can be further improved by the production because it can be changed stepwise according to the number advantage).

  (12) As shown in [Variation example of performing a pending consecutive notification effect with a winning image aura color], if the pending consecutive notification effect is executed, in the reserved storage information, the reserved storage information that is a symbol big hit and the small hit. Based on the inclusion of at least one of the pending storage information and the effect mode of the effect of displaying the aura image can be changed to a specific mode, the pending memory division method includes a symbol big hit or small hit Since it is possible for the player to recognize that the pending storage information, which is a big hit, is included, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by the effect.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 21, when a V prize is generated in the small hitting game state, at least one of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the held storage information determined to be the small hit. Based on the fact that one of them is included, it is possible to execute the pending continuous notification effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  (14) As shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined that a plurality of sums of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the held storage information determined to be the small hit are stored, a holding notification effect is produced. Since the execution is performed, the player can recognize that there are a plurality of pieces of held storage information that can be a big hit when the held consecutive notification effect is executed, thereby further enhancing the entertainment of the game by the effect. You can

  (15) As shown in FIG. 21, blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hitting game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to preferably execute the pending continuous notification effect regarding the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

  (16) In the held continuous notification effect, for example, the total number of pieces of held storage information that can be a big hit in the held storage information, such as “+ 3BONUS” in FIG. 21C and “+ 4BONUS” in FIG. 21D. When the number is less than the predetermined number (3 or the like) and when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number (4 or the like), the effect mode of the special effect to be executed is different. The crab player can be noticed.

  (17) As shown in FIG. 24, depending on the number of pending storage information that can be a big hit, which is a number of rounds that is advantageous to the player, such as a symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot and a small hit via 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot. Since the ratio of executing the continuous notification effect is different, when the held continuous notification effect is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how many big hits, which are advantageous round numbers, are executed.

  (18) In the holding consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table, when the total number of holding consecutive numbers of the symbol 15R hour short and big hit and the small hit 16 (15) R hour short and big hit among the big hit types is two or more, the held consecutive notification effect The data is set to run. As a result, when the holding continuous notification effect is executed, a plurality of pieces of holding storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous to the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types are stored. By being able to recognize, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 21, based on the fact that at least one of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the held storage information determined to be the small hit is included, Since the notification effect can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  (20) As shown in FIG. 21, the number of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the number of the held storage information determined to be the small hit are notified so that they can be specified in the holding consecutive notification effect, so that the player Since the player can specifically recognize the number of pieces of reserved storage information, which is advantageous for the player, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  (21) When a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state, the V winning notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, the continuous holding notification effect can be executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect when the winning occurs.

  (22) As shown in [Modification of production mode change of holding continuous notification production], when there are a plurality of total numbers of holding storage information that is a symbol big hit and via small hits, and when there is a plurality of holding storage information that is a big hit When the production mode of the held consecutive notification effect is different from the case where there are only a plurality of held storage information that is a big hit, it is possible to change the performed manner of the held consecutive notification effect depending on the holding consecutive type. The player can be made to pay attention to in which effect mode the held continuous notification effect is executed.

  (23) As shown in [Variation example of change in effect mode of hold continuous notification effect], when the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is different for each of the first hold continuous type to the third hold continuous type In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to in which effect mode the held continuous notification effect is executed.

  (24) As shown in [Variation in which limit control of the holding consecutive notification effect is performed], after executing the holding consecutive notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of holding consecutive notices, the holding which is the target of the pending consecutive notice effect is executed. By prohibiting execution of the held consecutive notification effect until all the stored information is exhausted, new execution of the held consecutive notification effect is restricted. You can clarify which one.

[Other modifications]
Next, other modifications and characteristic points will be listed below.

  (1) In the above-described embodiment, various selection decisions by lottery for executing the effect pattern of the round number suggesting effect may be executed at the start of fluctuation of the variable display which is a small hit, and the small hit game state and You may execute it when it becomes.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, as the number-of-rounds suggestive effect, an example in which the effect mode of the V winning aura image 95 is changed every time the game ball enters according to a predetermined effect pattern has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined by lottery whether or not the presentation mode (for example, color) of the V winning aura image 95 is changed each time the game ball enters, and based on the lottery result, the V winning aura image is obtained. You may make it change the presentation mode of 95. In that case, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the color and to determine and select the color to be changed for each detection of the entry of the game ball, and to make sure that the color is changed each time the entry of the game ball is detected. Alternatively, the color to be changed may be selected and determined.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which when the V winning aura image 95 becomes iridescent in the round number suggesting effect, it is determined that the 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot and the pending storage information for the pending series are present, the V winning aura image 95 may be rendered in a rainbow color. In addition, when the 5 (4) R hour / hour jackpot and the pending storage information for the pending series are present, the V winning aura image 95 may be rendered in a rainbow color.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the color of the V winning aura image 95 can be changed is executed in the round number suggesting effect as the predetermined effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the round number suggesting effect, an effect in which the V winning image 94 changes from the “v” shape to the “W” shape may be executed. In that case, the color of the V winning aura image 95 may be changed as in the case described above.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state described as an advantageous state is a representative example of the jackpot gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened a plurality of times.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as the round suggestion effect, an example of an effect in which the color of the V winning aura image 95 is changed in association with the V winning image 94 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. A V-winning aura image may be displayed as a non-accompanying image (for example, an aura-shaped effect image may be displayed at a position distant from the V-winning image 94) and the effect of changing the color may be displayed. Further, whether or not to execute the effect of changing the color of the V-winning aura image 95 in association with the V-winning image 94 is determined by a predetermined lottery, and may not be executed. .

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the total of the number of holding stations for the symbol big hit and the number of holding stations for the small hit can be specified as "+ 3BONUS" as the holding consecutive notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be such that the number of holding stations for the symbol big hit and the number of holding stations for the small hit can be individually specified.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the effect data when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10 is not provided as an effect pattern when executing the round number suggesting effect. Not limited to this, effect data may be provided when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10. For example, if the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10, the color may be the same as the color of the 10th ball, and so on. By doing so, even when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10, it is possible to execute the number-of-rounds suggestion effect without causing a feeling of strangeness.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the contents of the second holding storage information existing when the big hit game state occurs are prefetched, and the holding storage information that becomes the “symbol big hit” and the holding storage information that becomes the “small hit” An example in which the pending continuous notification effect is executed when either of the above is present is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect may be executed only when there is the hold storage information that is a “small hit”. The holding continuous notification effect may be executed only when there is held storage information that is a “symbol big hit”.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, in the second hold storage information that exists when the big hit game state occurs, when there is hold storage information that is a "symbol big hit", and when there is hold storage information that is a "small hit" In each of the cases where there is a case, an example in which the held continuous notification effect of the same effect mode is executed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous holding notification effect of different effect modes may be executed depending on the case where there is the pending storage information that is the “symbol big hit” and the case where there is the pending storage information that is the “small hit”.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the total number of “symbol big hits” and “small hits” in the second pending storage information existing when the big hit game state occurs, the same is true. The holding continuous notification effect of the effect mode may be executed, or the pending continuous notification effect of a different effect mode may be executed according to the total number.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, in the second pending storage information that exists when the big hit game state occurs, there is only a "symbol big hit", a case where there is only a "small hit", and a "symbol big hit". And the case where both of the small hits are present ", the same continuous hold notification effect may be executed, and depending on these cases, different continuous hold notification effects may be executed.

  (13) The read-ahead of the second hold storage information for executing the holding continuous notification effect may be executed at the start of the variable display of the small hit or the big hit, or may be executed during the small hit game state, It may be executed during the jackpot gaming state.

  (14) The V-lamp effect executed as the above-mentioned holding continuous notification effect may not be an effect capable of notifying the number of reserved stations, but may be an effect capable of notifying the number of reserved stations. In the case of an effect capable of notifying the number of holding stations, in the V lamp effect, the relationship between the number of holding stations and the light emission color of the lamp is determined in advance, and based on this relationship, the number of holding stations is determined by the lamp emission color. It may be possible to notify.

  (15) Regarding “big hit via small hit”, instead of selecting and determining the kind of big hit when it is judged as a small hit, when a V winning occurs, a plurality of control patterns such as the number of rounds of the big hit are provided. You may make it select from a control pattern of a kind.

  (16) The arrangement of structures such as the variable winning ball device 15, the V-judgment winning device 87, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 shown in the above-described embodiment is an example, and the following different arrangements may be adopted. May be adopted. For example, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 may be provided in the right game area. Further, a V winning area is provided inside the big hit variable winning ball device 20, and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 includes one variable winning ball device for big hit and one variable winning ball device for small hit. The device may also be used in common.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which, when a game ball is won in the V winning area of the V determination winning device 87, the jackpot gaming state is entered and only the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened. Not limited to this, in the jackpot gaming state, the V determination winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening mode, or only the V determination winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening mode. .

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the V determination winning device 87 is always opened when the game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened has been described. Without being limited to this, when the game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is determined whether or not to open the game ball based on a specific lottery, and the lottery result to be the open state. The V determination winning device 87 may be opened when the time is reached.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which when the game ball wins the V winning area in the V determination prize winning device 87 in the small hitting game state, it is controlled to the big hitting game state, but not limited to this. You may make it perform the operation | movement of such a game state by control of the big hit game state in which the same operation | movement as a game state is performed. For example, the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened in the first round, and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. When it is decided to execute such a big hit game control by the big hit judgment, such a big hit game state is started, and the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened as the control of the first round of the big hit game state. By making it appear as a small hit game state, when the game ball makes a V prize in the V prize area 870 in the first round, by continuing the big hit game state, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the second round. The subsequent round control is executed to make it look like a big hit game state. On the other hand, in the first round of the big hit game state, when the game ball does not win the V winning area 870 in the V determination prize winning device 87, the big hit game state is not continued in the second round and thereafter, and in the first round. Execute control to end.

  (20) The advantageous state advantageous to the player may include various advantageous states such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, and a high base state. In a gaming machine in which the jackpot determination probability can be controlled from a low-probability state to a high-probability state (probability change state), the high-probability state is also included in the advantageous state. In this embodiment, a more specific advantageous state is that the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the jackpot gaming state.

  (21) As the specific effect, the number of reach lines is increased (decreased display is also possible) according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second hold storage information), but the following effect is performed. May be For example, a predetermined icon image corresponding to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second pieces of stored information) (for example, a star-shaped image showing a character "RUSH" that is associated with a state advantageous to the player). The number may be increased (decrease may be displayed). In addition, the number of predetermined character images (for example, a special character image that is not displayed in other effects) may be increased (decreased may be displayed) according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (increase in the second hold storage information). It may be. In addition, a numerical image that counts down from the upper limit value (4) of the second reserved storage information number may be displayed according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase of the second reserved storage information number), and the current second reserved storage information may be displayed. You may display the numerical image which counts up to the upper limit (4) from the number of information (for example, 0 etc.). In this way, the specific effect may be an effect of any effect mode.

  (22) As the change effect, any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect in accordance with the increase in the number of the second hold storage information. For example, any effect may be used as long as the change of the effect mode in the various effects described above is executed in accordance with the increase in the number of the second hold storage information.

  (23) The change effect is to change the effect mode in which the number of reach lines is increased according to the number of second stored information items, but the reach symbol is a reach symbol using a symbol other than the “7” symbol. It may be. As such a reach symbol, a symbol other than the symbol included in the symbol string used for the normal variable display, for example, a symbol such as "RUSH" in which a character associated with a state advantageous to the player is shown is special. You may use a design.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine that pays out the game medium to the player in accordance with the occurrence of the prize has been described. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing the game points, so that a ball lending operation can be performed. Accordingly, the game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the shooting operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning. Although the gaming machine which pays out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize has been described, the game medium is enclosed, and the game point without paying out the game medium to the player according to the occurrence of the prize ( An enclosed game machine that adds points) may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing the game points, so that a ball lending operation can be performed. Accordingly, the game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the shooting operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (25) In the present embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is illustrated, but the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and is, for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100%. Of these, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

  (26) The gaming state that is advantageous to the player is a jackpot gaming state, a time saving state, a high base state, and a state in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is determined to be a jackpot compared to the normal state is high. Any gaming state may be used as long as it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, such as the probability change state.

  (27) In the above-mentioned operation effect, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 capable of detecting the operation of the operation means operable by the player such as the stick controller 122 is used as the detection means capable of detecting the operation (motion) of the player. Such detection means is shown as an example. However, the detection means is not limited to this, and other detection means such as the push sensor 124 capable of detecting the operation of the push button 120 may be used as the detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player, and the operation of the operation means is detected. Instead of the means for performing, a detection means such as an infrared sensor and a motion sensor that can directly detect the movement of the player may be used.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the later-described embodiments.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be considered that the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1), and variably displays identification information based on the fact that the gaming medium has won the winning device. , A variable display device for deriving and displaying a display result (variable display device 68SH009, etc.), a hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information regarding a variable display that has not been started, and after the end of the advantageous state. A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting winning of a game medium to the winning device during a predetermined period, and holding information stored by the holding storage means during the predetermined period. When the number reaches the upper limit number (4 or the like) of the hold information that can be stored in the hold storage means, arrival notification indicating that the upper limit number has been reached (eg, “arrival” is output) And an arrival notification means (e.g., a production control microcomputer 100) for executing the above, and a suggestion production execution means (e.g., production control CPU 90120) capable of executing a suggestion production (e.g., reach production) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. And a title notifying unit (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect, and the title notifying unit notifies the suggestive effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestive effect. A game machine that can notify the corresponding title (for example, FIGS. 43D and 43F) can be given.

  According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. Moreover, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period, and as an example of the form of the gaming machine in which the effect of the production is improved, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Is a controllable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901), and is capable of executing a suggestive production (for example, reach production) suggesting that the game is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, production control CPU 90120). And a title notifying unit (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect, and the title notifying unit notifies the suggestive effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestive effect. A game machine that can notify the corresponding title (for example, FIGS. 43D and 43F) can be given. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.
(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.)
FIG. 35 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 35) of the game board 902, a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol and the normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A are also referred to as “first special symbols”, and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B are also referred to as “second special symbols”. Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and a special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 905 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 905.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 905, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers, etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. Direction scroll display or update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, a display area may be provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display in which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display in execution. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are being held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 902, a first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 9025A is the number of LEDs to be turned on. To display the first number of reserved memories, and the second reserved indicator 9025B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 905, a winning ball device 906A and a variable winning ball device 906B are provided.

  The winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 906B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 9081 (see FIG. 36). The variable winning ball device 906B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece. Is close to the winning ball apparatus 906A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 9081 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 906B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening will be open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 906B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can change between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 35, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 9010 that are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members are provided. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 9010 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 906A and the variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 36), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When the game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening 9010, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 9010 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also called a starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 35), a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal figure game.

  On the left side of the image display device 905, a passage gate 9041 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 9041, the universal figure game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, a universal figure hold display 9025C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of regular figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 35) of the game board 902, a movable body 9032 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 9030 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, a stick controller 9031A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 9031A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 9031A is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035A (see FIG. 36).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 9031B is detected by the push sensor 9035B (see FIG. 36).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a stick controller 9031A and a push button 9031B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation etc.) of the player, but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball hitting operation handle 9030 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 906B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 906A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 906B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) while the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state which will be described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) As a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

  After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will be continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  The type of big hit is set in "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit game state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) are prepared. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

  In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by reducing the average figure change time (the period during which the figure changes) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (shortening of times of times cut, probability change of times of cut etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, etc., the pachinko gaming machine 901 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). The state is controlled in the same way as when the processing is not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 905, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R and / or the game effect lamp 909. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 9032, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 905 (decoration. The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. .

  In the case of "probability variation big hit" which is controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 905, a fixed decorative design (for example, ““ 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss”). (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 901 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 905, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then the variable display is resumed, so that one variable display can be seen as a pseudo multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, in some big hit type (the big hit type of the big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state by executing a common effect after the small hit game state and after the large hit game state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 905 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with, for example, a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 9015, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 9011 has a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103. , A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

  The CPU 90103 executes a program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 90101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 90102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 90101 may be expanded in the RAM 90102 and executed on the RAM 90102.

  The random number circuit 90104 counts updatable numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 90103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  I / O 90105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, normal symbol display 9020, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, the universal figure hold indicator 9025C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

  The switch circuit 90110 is a detection signal from a variety of switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 9021, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 9022A and second starting opening switch 9022B), count switch 9023) (a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that a switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. By the transmission of the detection signal, the passage or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 90111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 9081 or the solenoid 9082) from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric auditors or the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) is, as a part of the control of the progress of the game, a performance control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. 9012. The effect control command output from the main board 9011 is relayed by the relay board 9015 and supplied to the effect control board 9012. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 9011 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winnings, number of held storages, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 9011, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 9032, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  An effect control CPU 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, a display control section 90123, a random number circuit 90124, and an I / O 90125 are mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  The effect control CPU 90120 executes a program stored in the ROM 90121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 90123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 9012, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of)). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 90121 is used, and the RAM 90122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays the execution of effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A or the push sensor 9035B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). It may instruct the control unit 90123.

  The display control unit 90123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120.

  The display control unit 90123 displays the effect image on the image display device 905 by supplying the image display device 905 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120. The display control unit 90123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 9013 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. In addition, the display controller 90123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 9032 to the movable body 9032 or a driver circuit for driving the movable body 9032.

  The voice control board 9013 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 908L and 908R, drives the speakers 908L and 908R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 908L and 908R. Let

  The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 90123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The output control CPU 90120 executes audio output, control for turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.) and control of the movable body 9032 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 9032, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 90124 counts updatable the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 90120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the production control board 9012 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the production control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 9011 such as the effect control substrate 9012, the sound control substrate 9013, and the lamp control substrate 9014 are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 901, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 9011)
First, the main operation of the main board 9011 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 90103 on the main board 9011.

  In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 90103 first sets interruption prohibition (step S901). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 90102 accessible settings, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 90100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 90103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 90102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 9012 (step S909). When the production control CPU 90120 receives the production control command, for example, the image display device 905 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 901 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 90102, a data protection process of the RAM 90102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904). S905). In step S905, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 90102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 9002 is normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, and therefore the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 9011 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery processing, the CPU 90103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 90102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from power interruption to the effect control board 9012 (step S907). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating a display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 90120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 905 informs that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 90120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 9012, the CPU 90103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (eg, 2 ms) (step S9011), and interrupts are permitted (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepting the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 which has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to cause the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. Whether or not a detection signal is received from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9021). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, start information (starting). Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S9023).

  Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9024). After this, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9025). The CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S9026). The CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 9041) management of execution and suspension of the game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 906B based on the "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display 9020, and the number of general figure reservations is displayed by turning on the general figure reservation display 9025C.

  After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 90103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 90103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  39 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 38 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

  In the start winning determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, and updating the number of holding storages is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the holding information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 9012. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S9027 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S90110 to S90120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 9012 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In addition, in the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 90101 (a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 9011 and various decisions on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control board 9012, various tables are stored in the ROM 90121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not to display "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special drawing game (special drawing change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts varying It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the time cut state or the probability variation state is controlled and the cut-out is completed. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is terminated.

  The jackpot opening post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

  The big hit ending process of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of production control board 9012)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 40 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071) to clear the RAM 90122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 9012. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Also, the initial operation control process is executed (step S9072). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 9032, such as control for driving the movable body 9032 to return to the initial position, and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S9073). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9073; No), the process of step S9073 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 90125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 via the relay substrate 9015. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the production control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S9073 (step S9073; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S9074), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9075). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or the RAM 90122 is stored in the RAM 90122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 90123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S9075, the effect control process process is executed (step S9076). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, a sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting effect in a decorative light-emitting body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 9032. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S9076, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S9077), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 9012 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S9073. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S9073.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9076 of FIG. 40 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S90161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 9011. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified by the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 905, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 9011. Etc. are included. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 905, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various types The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 90123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 90123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 90123 causes the image display device 905 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern by the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 90120 instructs the display control unit 90123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S90171 on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or driving the movable body 9032, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 9011 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 9011. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during small hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command for ending the small winning game state from the main board 9011, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

  The small hit end production process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit completion effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit mid-hit effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid-game production process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 9011. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 in the above basic description was a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, so that the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are mounted.

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in the. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 42 (A), in the present embodiment, the variable patterns PA1′-1 and PA1′-1 for non-reach-losing in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “miss”. -2, reach variation mode of decorative display is a reach mode and the display result is "miss". Reach loss variation patterns PA2'-1 to PA2'-6, PA3'-1 to PA3'-4, etc. are displayed. Fluctuation patterns PB2'-1 to PB2'-6, PB3'-1 to PB3'-4, etc., which result in "big hit" are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is, as shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 42B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B. <Higher in order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) to reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3′-1 to PA3′-4 and the variation patterns PB3′-1 to PB3′-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 42A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. . Note that FIG. 42 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 42B, the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the super-reach other than that is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. Note that the title notification mode may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title characters (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of performance operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 90120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 9011. 43 and 44 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 43 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of the image display device 5. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is set. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 905, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a specific period of time elapses from the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction part of the reach production of super reach (also called super reach production) ends, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), the entire screen of the image display device 905. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters “SP Reach A”) is displayed on the screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, “Super Reach A”) is output from the speaker 908. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the enemy character character 31AK003 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

  Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 905 during the super reach effect, the speaker 908 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 43 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 905 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 905 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a specific period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 43 (F), the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here "SP reach B" is displayed, and the speaker 908 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach ("super reach B" in this case) to notify the title of super reach B. It After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, as shown in FIG. 43 (G), the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a specific period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 43 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 43 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the titles are In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 43 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You may By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 43 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 905. At the same time, the speaker 908 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy"), so that the title of the super reach D is notified. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 43 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 905 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 43 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 43 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. It

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 905. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. To be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach productions of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is informed (FIGS. 43D, 43F, (F). H)). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, in the super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the reach effect of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a specific period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is announced after a specific period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a specific period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 905, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 905 is displayed. The title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 905 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is used as a background for the title notification and the title is displayed there. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area in which the title notification is performed according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of the present embodiment, and the display area in which the title notification is performed according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display place may be changed.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level indication is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his / her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. It should be noted that the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expectation indication is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 43 (H), etc., and the expectation may be indicated by a meter or gauge, or the expectation may be displayed. The displayed numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (H) and the like, in the case of being indicated by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars may be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described below is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing because the effect can be improved at any timing.

  Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each reach effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 905 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 showing that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (C), and a big hit combination is made as shown in FIG. 44 (D). The fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharp effect.

  In the example of the production operation shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 905, but during the reach production. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile device linkage on the image display device 905, during the reach production of super reach, it is not displayed as appropriate in order to draw attention to the reach production. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the reach effect with low reliability, and to focus on the reach effect in the reach effect with high reliability.

(Development production)
Next, an example of a production operation when the development production is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and an effect that the screen is torn is executed. Then, in the case of developing into super reach A, as shown in FIG. 45 (C), the title of super reach A is announced and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. When developing into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 45 (D), the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 45, in the case where the reach of the development destination is the reach for notifying the title by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 45 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating failure) is displayed. You may do it. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development of gasse, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 43 (H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 was designed such that black stars indicating the expectations were displayed from the beginning, but five white stars were displayed first, and then stepwise. You may make it perform an expectation suggestion production which shows an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 46 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021. A production that fits into one of the white stars of is executed. At this time, the speaker 908 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 46D and 46E, the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 908 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 46 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two levels or more. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and it fits in the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases You may make it perform the effect which does.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect devices such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the game effect lamp 909. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 9011, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 905, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 908, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  FIGS. 46 (G) to (L) are example production operations of title notification and expectation suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production modes. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 46 (A) to (F), the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a sound corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 908, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 46 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. An effect that fits in one of the white rhombuses of is executed. At this time, the speaker 908 outputs the sound “Pong” indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 46 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted such as shining as shown in FIG. 46 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., the title notification mode is made different, and the effect is diversified. improves.

  Although FIG. 46 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the title of the reach and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an anticipation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the anticipation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggesting effect in which the display showing the expectation of the expectation suggesting display is increased stepwise, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display showing the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 905. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 9031B is detected, as shown in FIG. 47C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters of "SP reach C") is displayed, and thus the super reach C is displayed. The Reach C title is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 9032 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), a title notice for changing the display color of the title 31AK036 to red is executed. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 48, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

  In addition, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output after the title display mode is changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice production determination process for determining whether or not to execute the notice production and the manner of production. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 90120 within the variable display start setting process of step S90171 of FIG. 41. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 9011 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold type and the characters themselves are the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be the "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 48, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super-reach (for example, super-reach D or super-reach E) having a long title display period, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 50 (B) in the special mode. Determine the title display color in different proportions. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the dialogue) of the character in the reach production of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 50 (C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue and the effect is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the performance modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the effect modes are the same. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timings of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that instead of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results of 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super-reach, but the title notice in the case of a specific super-reach (for example, except super-reach with low reliability) is possible. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 50, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialog notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice production with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of which effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the number of colors (how many stages) to change may be different. . By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue acts when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

  As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any one of the title and the dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above characteristic section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 905, a sub liquid crystal may be provided in the game board 902 or the game machine frame 903. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, near the image display device 905, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title like the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 905 notifies the title. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 905, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to the notification of the title related to other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect in which a background image and an effect mode on the image display device 905 are changed to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Use a stick controller to destroy all enemies”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of a mission title.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( 44 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win / loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

  51 and 52 are diagrams showing an example of the operation operation of super reach in the modification in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 51 (A), after the image display device 905 has reached the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), a character 31AK041 that is a friend character and a character 31AK042 that is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 51 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 52 (G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 51C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 905. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 9031B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a pleased character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 52 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is hit by the bullet. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

  After that, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 52 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 52 (K). A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 9031A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 9031A is in the valid operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 9031A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (L). After that, at the timing when the variable time ends, as shown in FIG. 52 (M), a fixed decorative design that is a big hit combination is derived. Note that when an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 52 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and when the operation effects using these images are executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  51 and 52, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 49.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. A specific image may be included and displayed when displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 908 outputs a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 909 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 909 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 53 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 53A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 905. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 908 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 is executed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 53 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 53 (c).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters “battle reach” indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

  Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 908 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may be partially overlapped.

  After that, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 53 (e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" Is displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen based on the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 53 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 53 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 53 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 53A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 53D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 49. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the result of determining the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when it is determined that the title display color is a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the determination regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 49.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 150IW)
Next, the characteristic unit 150IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 54-1 and 54-2, a pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly classified into an outer frame 150IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 902 (see FIG. 35) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 150IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 150IW003a having a glass window is provided in the gaming machine frame 150IW003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. The glass door frame 150IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 150IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 9011 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 while being housed in a board case 150IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a setting key 150IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

  The setting switching main body part provided with an operation part such as these setting keys 150IW051 that can be operated by the player is housed in the board case 150IW201 together with the main board 9011, and the setting key 150IW051 does not open the board case 150IW201. The substrate case 150IW201 is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back side so that it can be operated.

  Since the board case 150IW201 having the setting key 150IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is impossible with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 closed, The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 by using the door key. Further, the setting key 150IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in a game arcade, so that only a store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 150IW051 is also a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic part 150IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

  Further, a display monitor 150IW029 and a display changeover switch 150IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 150IW029 are arranged on the board case 150IW201. The display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are connected to the main board 9011 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 150IW201. That is, the display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are arranged on the front side when the main board 9011 in the board case 150IW201 is viewed. The main board 9011 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 9011 is the back side of the gaming board 902 in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 9011 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be common.

  As described above, the setting key 150IW051 in the feature section 150IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not operate. The setting key 150IW051 may be operated from the inside of the installed gaming island. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 150IW, as shown in FIGS. 54-2 and 54-3, the right side portion of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is provided at the right end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. A security cover 150IW500A that covers the front side of the is attached. The security cover 150IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 150IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 150IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 150IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. , A plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 150IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 150IW201. The security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 150IW001a via the front end of the short piece 150IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 54-2, the long piece 150IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 150IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Therefore, the setting key 150IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 150IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the setting key 150IW051 moves with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and moves away from the long piece 150IW500Ab. When the covering state with 150IW500Ab is released, the state becomes operable.

  In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this characteristic unit 150IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the above-described restriction state by the security cover 150IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted.

  Since the board case 150IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 150IW051 unless the game machine frame 150IW003 is opened by the door key or the like.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901. An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted between a gaming device such as a card unit or the like, a spacer member and a pachinko gaming machine 901, and a setting key 150IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is inserted. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value is performed by operating the, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. The above-mentioned fraudulent activities can be appropriately suppressed by maintaining the regulated state It can be.

  Further, even when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500A, it is accommodated in the substrate case 150IW201 through the transparent security cover 150IW500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 9011 and the like on which it is mounted, it is possible to easily check the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 90103 and the like on the main board 9011 are mounted and the situation such as a seal.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the program read from the ROM 90101 and uses the RAM 90102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Further, the CPU 90103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, on the main substrate 9011 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software updating using a different random counter in the CPU 90103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 90100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 90100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-4 and 54-5, which are prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 90101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 90103 to output various control signals from the main board 9011, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol A variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns that are stored is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 90101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 54-4 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 54-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 54-5 (A), a big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a general variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 in the characteristic unit 150IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the setting value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. . The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value being in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the feature section 150IW, the winning probability for a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
54-4 (A) to 54 (C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 90101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 54-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set values are “2” and “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hit, the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. It is supposed to win.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 during non-probability change, 1/30 during probability change) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is a "1" or "3", with the same probability (1/2) as a small win.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in non-probability change, 1/28 in probability change) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is supposed to do. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when non-probable variation, 1/28 when probable variation) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is small with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "2".

  That is, the CPU 90103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 54-4 (A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when the MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 54-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 54-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In addition, determining whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, determining whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 54-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, similar to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may increase as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, You may set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine in which no small hit is provided, the configuration shown by the characteristic part 150IW may be applied.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the CPU 90103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, using the display result judgment tables shown in FIGS. 54-4 (A) to (C). The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit may be determined by using different tables for the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the case where the degree of advantage increases in the order of the set value “1” <the set value “2” <the set value “3” is shown, for example, the order of the advantage degree according to the game state. May be changed. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintain the high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 54-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in a particular game state (in this example, high probability / high base state), unlike other game states, on the contrary, big hits are unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is easy to continue) The value “1” may be set to have the highest advantage.

  Further, for example, the same probability change is applied when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the fact that the change display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability change end count) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of times of termination, the probability variation continuation rate (rate of condominium) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1” <set value “2” <set value “3”.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, as a set value which can be set to the pachinko gaming machine 901, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in 901 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 54-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

  The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot type A to jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 54-5 (A), the determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that in the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-7, which will be described later, the determination value corresponding to the random number is actually assigned. For simplification, the percentage of the assigned decision value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 54-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the jackpot type B is highly determined and the setting value is “3”, the jackpot type A is highly determined.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 150IW will be described with reference to FIG. 54-5 (B). In the feature portion 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period when the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S90114 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and the jackpot game state is started after the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 9012 side. It is a period during which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot opening post-processing of step S90116 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and on the effect control board 9012 side, after the round in which the special winning opening is opened is finished, Is a period in which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S90117 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 9012 side. It is a period of time.

  As shown in FIG. 54-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the big hit type A, the longest in the big hit type B, and the longest in the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

  As described above, in the characteristic unit 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the percentage of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and thus the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature section 150IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed and Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  The feature section 150IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big hit game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. In addition, by directing the player's interest to the suggestion production during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

  In addition, in the feature unit 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball-out rate) is set high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set are selected in the descending order of the big hit type A <B <C. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In the present characteristic part 150IW, in any of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the big hit game state is a special number of times (100 times in the present characteristic part 150IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a particular big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. In the feature unit 150IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rates (rates of consecutive holidays) may be different.

  Further, in the feature section 150IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.) It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control are different, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  In the characteristic unit 150IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value being set, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. In other words, if the jackpot type determination rate differs according to the set value, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the type of jackpot. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be uniformly determined depending on which of the set values is "1" to "3". Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. You may.

  In this way, in the characteristic part 150IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. ..

  In addition, in the feature part 150IW, the big hit type is determined using the random number MR2 which is a big hit type determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous to the player (the high jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

  Further, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 1, the gaming performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65% in a loop, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game is different depending on the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 3 (so-called V probability variation type), the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. Yes, the game play is controlled during a high base (during time saving control) by passing a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 to a big hit game state (so-called type 1 type 2). Mixed type) may be used. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are the same in playability as 1 to 3, the probability of a big hit or a small hit is higher than that in the case of any of these set values 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 is a game switch (a game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a positive variation state or a big hit gaming state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 54-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 90101. As shown in FIG. 54-5 (C), in the present feature part 150IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 54-5 (C), in the present feature part 150IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “3” is set.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 150IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the opening period and the number of times of opening the special winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantage degree in the game is the same. .

(Variation pattern determination table)
Further, the ROM 90101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "big hit" and the variation display result "small hit" The small hitting variation pattern determination table used when is predetermined and the variation variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to change the variation display result to "miss" are prepared in advance. .

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 54-6 is an explanatory diagram of the loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic unit 150IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( In the following, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and different loss variation pattern determination tables are used.

  Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first lost variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 54-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic unit 150IW, the period from when the setting is changed at power-on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a real time clock or the like may be used to set a special period in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

  In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-6 (A) and (B), both normal reach loss and super reach loss occur in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, and thus the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

  Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (B), and further has the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given to enhance the fun of the game.

  Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns with super reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do it. By doing this, the execution rate differs only for a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. Note that conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

  Further, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example). 54-6 (B). Specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (B) shows the normal reach loss in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, setting suggestive effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value, The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different according to the set value.

  In the feature unit 150IW, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 905 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 905, and the decorative pattern is variably displayed. Note that the special background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

  Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a setting value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the normal pattern, and the setting value is 1 or 2) May be selected) to allow the special variation pattern to be selected only in the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach lost variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 54-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 150IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined as non-reach-loss variation, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

  As shown in FIG. 54-7, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach-miss variation C (variation time of 7 seconds) is high and the setting value is "2". If the setting value is "3", the rate determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

  In the feature unit 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature section 150IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different by changing the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss or super reach loss) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern or the high-speed variation display etc. may be made different so as to produce the effect. It is desirable that there be no difference in how they look.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the average variation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the fixed decorative pattern (final The period in which the stop pattern) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed decorative design (final stop design) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The fixed time may be set, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is higher.

  The characteristic unit 150IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening that has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the characteristic unit 150IW, the fluctuation time for shortening, which is used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, may be changed according to the set value.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the feature unit 150IW will be described. 54-8 to 54-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 150IW. In the characteristic unit 150IW, the processing of steps IWS001 and S002 is the same as the processing of steps S901 and S902 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 90103 waits for the production control means to start until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 90120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 150IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the effect control CPU 90120 is activated. Next, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 150IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 150IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 150IWS004 and the processes of steps 150IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 150IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS003 to S005, the processing of step 150IWS006 and thereafter is executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 90120 is activated, and the setting value change and confirmation, RAM initialization and restoration processing, etc. are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command for restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 90120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 90103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when turning on the power to the gaming machine (step 150IWS006).

  In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power-off process (see step 150IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is cleared once in step 150IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 150 IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Good.

  Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S904 (step 150IWS007). Specifically, in step 150IWS007, the CPU 90103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS007; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S905, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 150IWS008). In step 150IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 90102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (step 150IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal (step 150IWS008; Yes), the CPU 90103 confirms whether the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “3”. (Step 150 IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is any of the set values “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to step 150IWS011.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (N in step 150IWS008), or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 150IWS009). The CPU 90103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  When the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is any of the set values “1” to “3” (N in step 150 IWS009), the CPU 90103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag indicating that is set is set (step 150IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 150IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  In step 150IWS012, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS013). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 90103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 150IWS015).

  In this example, the RAM clear processing includes a RAM clear 1 processing (see step 150IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 processing (see step 150IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

  In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 90103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 90102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 90102 are cleared, Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are not cleared and retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 90102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

  In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 90103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 90102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as consecutive ratio, winning combination, and base among the storage areas of the RAM 90102 are cleared, and the performance display such as consecutive ratio, winning ratio, and base Information is retained without being cleared. Further, in the RAM clear 2 processing, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 90102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is larger than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing.

  Then, the CPU 90103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS016), and proceeds to step 150IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is OFF (N in step 150IWS012), the setting key 150IW051 is OFF (N in step 150IWS013), and the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In N of step 150IWS014, the CPU 90103 performs control for transmitting a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS017).

  Next, the CPU 90103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 150IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 90103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 150IWS018). When the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 90103 proceeds to step 150IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 150IWS019). For example, the CPU 90103 controls the display monitor 150IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E"). Further, the CPU 90103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 150IWS020). Then, the processing from step 150IWS018 onward is repeatedly executed.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS007 to S020, in the characteristic unit 150IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 150IWS007 and S008, Y in step 150IWS009), power failure or the like occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y of step 150IWS011), the RAM is cleared and the set value after step 150IWS025 is set on condition that the setting key 150IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened and the setting key 150IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 150IWS011; No), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 90103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS022).

  In this example, by executing the processing of step 150IWS022 and step 150IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Then, after that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes where it is confirmed whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. However, instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch, by checking whether the RAM clear flag is set or not, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. (See steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048).

  Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS024). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 90103 performs control to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value is executed to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating execution of setting change processing for changing the setting value to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 150IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality in the RAM 90102 is detected), the CPU 90103 stores the setting value determination buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 90102 for storing the current setting value). The set value is set to "1" (step 150IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030. At this time, the CPU 90103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, when the setting confirmation command or the setting change command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 905). Is displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode). In this case, the production control board 9012 may be configured to display a "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode by pressing an operation button for production such as a push button 9031B. “Maintenance mode” means, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, the history of various error occurrences (a record of when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change). This is the mode in which you can check the recorded settings. When the setting key 150IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also completed.

  Next, the CPU 90103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 150IWS030). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 90103 proceeds to step 150IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 150IWS031). In the power-off process of step 150IWS031, the CPU 90103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in the ON state). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off process, when the CPU 90103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop process for storing necessary data (for example, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

  Next, the CPU 90103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the identified set value on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS032). Further, the CPU 90103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 150IWS033).

  Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS043.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 sets the setting change flag (step 150IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial setting completion flag indicating that the value has been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on (step 150IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 90102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completed flag is set (if the value has been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the game machine was powered on), the process proceeds to step 150IWS039.

  If the flag set for the first time is not set (that is, if the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer once even after the game machine is powered on), the CPU 90103 sets the clear switch buffer to the ON state. The value shown (for example, "1") is set (step 150IWS037). Further, the CPU 90103 sets the initial setting completion flag (step 150IWS038).

  Next, the CPU 90103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 150IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is a buffer provided in the RAM 90102 for setting the input state (on or off) of the clear switch that was confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the last time clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of "0" is set in the off state.

  Next, the CPU 90103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 150IWS040). Next, the CPU 90103 turns the value previously set in the clear switch buffer OFF (for example, “0”) and turns the value set in the clear switch buffer ON (for example, “1”). It is confirmed whether or not (step 150IWS041).

  If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 90103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. At the same time as displaying, it is stored in the set value determination buffer (update storage for the set value already stored) (step 150IWS042). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to “2” and the set value “2” is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to "3" and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. If "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to "1" and the set value "1" is stored in the set value determination buffer.

  Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is turned on (step 150IWS043). If the setting key 150IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030, the processes of steps 150IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 150IW051 is off, the CPU 90103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 150IWS044.

  When the RAM clear flag is not set by executing the processing of the above steps 150IWS025 to S043 (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the game machine is powered on) (steps 150IWS025 and S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 150IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the game machine is powered on) (Y in steps 150IWS025 and S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 150IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) and a setting change process (especially 150IWS035 to S042) are performed.

  Next, the CPU 90103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 150IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 150IWS033. The security information timer is set in step 150IWS044, and the information output process (step S9023) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

  On the other hand, in the present example, the security signal is externally output even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs by executing the process of step 150IWS020, but in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is done.

  Next, the CPU 90103 resets the setting change flag (step 150IWS045). Further, the CPU 90103 erases the setting value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS046). Further, the CPU 90103 controls to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS047).

  Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 150IWS049. Note that the processing of steps 150IWS049 and S050 in the characteristic unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S906 and S907 shown in FIG.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 executes the RAM clear 1 process to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102 (150IWS051). Note that the processing of steps 150IWS052 to S055 in the characteristic unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S909 to S9012 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 54-11 is an explanatory diagram of a process executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 150IW, as shown in FIG. 54-11, the clear switch is turned on when the setting key 150IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is turned on). If so, the setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) and the setting change process (especially 150IWS035 to S042) are executed, the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) is executed and the restoration process (step 150IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 150IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, Only the restoration process (step 150IWS049) is executed.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 54-12 (A) and 54-12 (B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big winning hole is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 9082.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54-12 (C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 150IW051 is turned on. The setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 90103 on the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029.

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 54-12 (D), the CPU 90103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. Each time the display switch 150IW029 is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the clear switch is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...). In addition, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 90102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54-12 (E), the CPU 90103 turns off the display monitor 150IW029 based on that the setting key 150IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the clerk or the like in the amusement hall, thereby turning on the amusement hall. The clerk or the like is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102.

  Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 54-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 90103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  In the setting change process in the characteristic unit 150IW, an example is shown in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 150IW029, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 150IW) or the most advantageous to the player. You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 150IW).

  In the example shown in FIG. 54-12, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display on the display monitor 150IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value. Without being limited to this mode, for example, the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 150IW029 may be used to display the set value. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 150IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays 4-digit "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 shows "-S-2". May be displayed, or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 150IW029 may display 4-digit "-S-3". Further, for example, the setting values may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 150IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays four digits of "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 displays four digits of "2222". May be.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S90110) in the main feature unit 150IW will be described. 54-13 and 54-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S90110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 90103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 150IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 90103 checks whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 150IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 90103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 150 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 90103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 150IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 150IWS102 to S104, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 150IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

  Next, in the RAM 90102, the CPU 90103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of one indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS105). Specifically, the CPU 90103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 90103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102.

  Then, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the content of each storage area (step 150IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 90103 stores the first reserved storage buffer in the RAM 90102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 90102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

  Then, the CPU 90103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 150IWS107). The CPU 90103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  Next, the CPU 90103 sends a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 90102 to the effect control board 9012 (step 150IWS108). As described above, in the characteristic part 150IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change processing is executed at the time of power-on by executing the processing of step 150IWS047. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 150 IWS 108.

  In this example, the same set value command is transmitted when the set value command is transmitted in step 150IWS047 and when the set value command is transmitted in step 150IWS108, but the set value command is different. It may be configured to send a command. For example, in step 150IWS047, a command for directly designating a setting value (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) according to the setting values “1” to “3”) is transmitted, while in step 150IWS108, the setting value is set. It may be configured such that identifiable fluctuation pattern commands are transmitted and the fluctuation pattern commands are prepared for the number of set values (for example, when the set value is “1”, commands 1C00 (H) to The command 2C00 (H) -is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "2", and the command 3C00 (H) -is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "3".

  Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each set value even when the same variation pattern is used, the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) ) Change pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern may be provided with the fluctuation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

  In this example, the same set value command is sent for the set value command (see step 150IWS047) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 150IWS108) sent at the start of fluctuation. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the set value command for power-on and the set value command for start of fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted at power-on and at the start of fluctuation. Good.

  Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 90100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which setting value is on the effect control CPU 90120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. Alternatively, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a rate, or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate if the setting value is 3. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence / absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence / absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio The variation pattern may be selected with.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation, for example.

  Further, the CPU 90103 controls to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 9012 according to the current game state (step 150IWS109). In this case, the CPU 90103, for example, performs control to transmit the probability variation state background designation command in the case of the probability variation state, performs control to transmit the time variation state background specification command in the case of time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

  Next, the CPU 90103 reads out the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 54-4) with the random number value MR1 and, if they match, determines to make a big hit or a small hit. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 150IWS110), the CPU 90103 performs a small hit determination process (step 150IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 150IWS111), the CPU 90103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 150IWS112), and proceeds to step 150IWS116.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 150IWS111), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS116.

  When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 150 IWS110), the CPU 90103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 90103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 54-5), and the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 150 IWS114).

  Further, the CPU 90103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 90103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 150IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to a big hit classification. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90111) (step 150IWS117).

(Production mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 150IW will be described. 54-15 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 150IW. In the characteristic control unit 150IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number updating process of step S9077 is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 150IWS201), and thereafter. The process returns to step S9073.

  In the present characteristic part 150IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 905 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode changing process of step 150IWS201, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when a real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 9012, the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined day or time has been reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed to change the effect mode based on the decision to change the effect mode.

  In step 150IW201, when the effect control CPU 90120 changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A →. The modes A to C may be randomly changed.

(Command analysis process)

  54-16 and 54-17 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S9075). The effect control command received from the main board 9011 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 150IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 150IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 150IWS303). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

  If the received effect control command is the setting value command (step 150IWS304), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 90122 (step). 150 IWS 305). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 150IWS306).

  In the characteristic unit 150IW, since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by power, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. It Since the effect control board 9012 is activated in a state where the setting value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits the setting value command even when the setting confirmation processing or the restoration processing is executed. The configuration may be configured so that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the setting change processing is performed. However, the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing command or garbled data. If not received, the process of step 150 IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in the characteristic unit 150IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 150IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It can be executed so that the set value is stored in the set value storage area.

  Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the production control CPU 90120 side, the set value command is changed to the set value command. It may be configured to determine whether the included setting value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of “1” to “3”, but includes a value that cannot be set such as “5” or “10”. If it is set, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 side stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, the setting value command newly received is used. If the set value shown does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and an abnormality may be determined. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command is not normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the feature section 150IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the feature control unit 150IW, when the production control board 9012 side receives either the initialization designation command or the restoration command from the main board 9011 in the command analysis processing, the image display device 905 displays a predetermined initial appearance. (Specifically, a combination of decorative patterns, which is displayed on the image display device 905 until the first variable display is started) is controlled (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial appearance effect).

  If the received effect control command is the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration (step 150IWS307), the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS308). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. Based on the set value that is set, by using the initial hit determination table, even initial hits (for example, "246" or "224", etc.), which is a combination of even decorative patterns, and odd decorative patterns are combined. It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number that is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 150IWS309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  FIG. 54-18 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial result determination table. In step 150IWS309, random number based lottery processing is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 54-18 (A), the odds of initial outcomes are increased in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 905 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, it means that the setting has been changed, and an advantageous setting value compared to the case where the even initial number is displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 54-18 (A), the special initial result may be decided only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 905 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the game starts can be made to be interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the gaming shop, and the interest can be enhanced.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS310). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the setting value is “1” and determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 54-18 (A) (step 150IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 150IW is the most disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 54-18 (A), with respect to the set value “1”, the odds of being decided as the initial odd number are the lowest, and there is no case where it is decided as the special initial number. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the odd initial roll number and the special initial roll number are displayed and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the initial result determination table for effect mode C to determine the initial result (step 150IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  FIG. 54-18 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 54-18 (B), in the initial result determination table for effect mode C, the odd initial initial result is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player. The proportion is low, and it is not decided that it is a special initial result.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS312 to S313, in the characteristic unit 150IW, a disadvantageous setting value is set when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. Despite the fact that the odd initial numbers and the special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to display the initial result determined in steps 150IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 150IWS314).

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the initial result to be an even number and the image display device 905. In step 1, control is performed to display an even-numbered initial result (step 150IWS315).

  By executing the process of step 150IWS315, the present characteristic part 150IW uniformly displays the even initial numbers when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is set. By this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying an odd initial number or a special initial number despite the disadvantageous set value, and prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

  Even when the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial winning symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial-drawing symbols is set lower than the setting value "1" of the initial-numbering determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

  In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally, and in the case of the production mode B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

  Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 150IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, it is configured to store an exclusive set value (for example, set value “4”) indicating that the set value command could not be received normally in the set value storage area and determine the initial result. Good.

  If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 150IWS316), the production control CPU 90120 executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 150IWS317). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character display such as "A setting value error has occurred" on the image display device 905, or outputs a voice or an error sound indicating the setting value error from the speakers 908L and 908R. It outputs and controls the game effect lamp 909 and the LED to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error is notified, the loudspeaker 908L, 908R outputs a sound with a maximum volume and an error sound, and the game effect lamp 909 and the LED emit light with the maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED). In this case, it is desirable to emit white light.

  If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (production control command that designates a variation pattern) (step 150IWS320), the production control CPU 90120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command stored in the RAM. The data is stored in the area (step 150 IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (effect control command for specifying whether to make a big hit or a small hit, big hit type, small hit type) (step 150IWS323), for effect control The CPU 90120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 150IWS324).

  If the received production control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (a production control command that designates that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 150IWS325), the production control CPU 90120 sets the confirmation command reception flag ( Step 150 IWS 326).

  If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game) (step 150IWS327), the production control CPU 90120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 150IWS328).

  If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (a production control command that specifies the end of a big hit game) (step 150IWS329), the production control CPU 90120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 150IWS330).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 150IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS301.

  Although the characteristic part 150IW is configured not to display the odd initial number when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the odd initial number may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial number and the even-numbered number, an initial number that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, A value 2 or a set value 3 is confirmed), an initial result that a specific set value is confirmed, or the like may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied, and the set value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting the specific initial result to be determined only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial result is displayed, it is confirmed that the setting value is 3. . Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the present characteristic part 150IW, the setting value is configured to be changeable, and as a setting suggesting effect that suggests the setting value, a pre-game suggesting effect executed before the game starts, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, It is configured to be able to perform suggestion during a game that is executed during the variation display of a decorative pattern, setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and suggestion during a big hit during a big hit (for example, during a big hit game). Has been done. It should be noted that in the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes having different suggestion reliability, for example, the type of the setting suggestion effect The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The suggestion reliability during the game may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game, or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, pre-game suggestion effects or initial appearance effects in which setting change is suggested), or the execution rate. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operating means such as the push button 9031B or the operating means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 54-19 is a flowchart of an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS501).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to end it if the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step 150IWS502, step 150IWS503). The control for ending the display of the displayed puzzle display is performed (step 150IWS504). The puzzle display is started by executing the process of step 150IWS518 described later.

  Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 150IWS505), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 150IWS506), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 150IWS507). It is confirmed (step 150 IWS508). In step 150IWS508, for example, when the timer (for example, set to 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed even once, and before the game starts), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

  If the time measured by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 150IWS509). That is, in step 150IWS509, it is confirmed whether the game is not started yet.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS510). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120, based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122, Using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestive effect is executed (step 150IWS511). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect including the aspect is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  FIG. 54-20 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In step 150IWS511, lottery processing based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-20 (A), Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 54-20 (A), determination values are assigned in order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestive effect is executed becomes higher. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 54-20 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS512). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. And the effect mode is determined (step 150IWS513). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS512 to S513, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 54-20 (A), with respect to the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS514). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine the presence or absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  FIG. 54-20 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 54-20 (B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the case is not determined as the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS514 to S515, in the characteristic unit 150IW, a disadvantageous setting value is set when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 150IWS511, S513, and S515 (step 150IWS516). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS518.

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds directly to step 150IWS517. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS514, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not executing the pre-game suggestion production, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

  Note that the ratio is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 54-20 (A), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes may be executed at different rates depending on the set value. You may

  In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is determined that the value is the setting value 2 or the setting value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode according to the set value. (Including 3 effect modes), different execution ratios of the 1st effect mode, 2nd effect mode, and 3rd effect mode depending on the set value, only specific effect modes depending on the set value This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  The characteristic unit 150IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

  For example, FIG. 54-20 (C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-20 (A) and the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-20 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 90120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 150IWS517). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

  When the process of step 150 IWS 517 is executed, for example, in the image display device 905, an execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or big hit suggestion effect), execution content (effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the processing of step 150IWS517 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, The image display device 905 may display execution history information of setting suggestive effects. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the number of executions and execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial hit effect effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, big hit suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. The information may be stored in advance, and an effect of inferring a set value from the information and notifying the set value may be executable. It should be noted that this effect is to notify the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, not to notify the actual setting value. .

  In the characteristic part 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 150IWS509 to 150IWS516. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 150IWS517, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop, and the interest can be increased. . Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, by using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time period (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Good. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect may not include information about the suggesting effect during game during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 905 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to shoot a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server will use the received information. You may make it manage the game history of a player, and perform the process which gives a predetermined privilege according to the game history. The player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information by using the mobile terminal, so that the setting suggesting image suggesting the setting value may be displayed on the display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined reference from the execution history information is calculated, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to start displaying the puzzle display on the image display device 905 based on the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter (step 150IWS518).

  In this example, there may be a case where a puzzle effect in which jigsaw puzzle pieces are gradually aligned is displayed while the decorative design is being displayed. When the puzzle effect is executed, an effect is performed such that every time the puzzle effect is executed, one piece out of any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is prepared. Then, after the puzzle production has been executed a plurality of times, it is suggested that the setting value is "1" when all the pieces of the puzzle 1 are finally completed, and the setting value is set when all the pieces of the puzzle 2 are completed. It is suggested to be "2", and it is suggested that the setting value is "3" when the puzzle 3 is completed with all pieces.

  Further, in this example, the puzzle is not always displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern every time, but only the variable display determined to execute the puzzle effect (that is, the variable display in which one of the puzzle pieces increases). Only) the puzzle is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed and the customer waiting demonstration display is being displayed, the puzzle display is displayed on the image display device 905 by executing the processing of step 150IWS518, and the puzzle 1 The gathering state of each piece of 3 to 3 can be confirmed.

  The first piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 1. The second piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 2. The third piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 3. In this example, since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by power supply, the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter stored in the RAM 90122 are not supplied with power to the gaming machine. When the game machine is powered on, it is assumed that the value of the first piece counter to the third piece counter is 0.

  In step 150IWS518, an image of puzzle 1 in which a number of pieces corresponding to the value of the first piece counter is collected is displayed, and an image of puzzle 2 in which a number of pieces corresponding to the value of the second piece counter is collected is displayed, The puzzle display is displayed by displaying an image of puzzle 3 in which a number of pieces corresponding to the value of the third piece counter are collected.

(Variable display start setting process)
54-21 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S90171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 41. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 150IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 150IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (stop). (Symbol) is determined (step 150 IWS602). In other words, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the process of step 150IWS602 to display the display result of variable identification information (decorative pattern stop) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 150IWS602, the effect control CPU 90120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  In step 150IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as a stop symbol. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit), the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as a stop symbol. To do.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the decorative designs of the small hit symbols according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. . In this example, in the case of small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol, and the small hit. When the type is C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a deviation, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

  If the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90120, in step 150IWS602, a chance eye symbol (for example, “223” or “445” as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo sequence). , Which is a combination of a big hit symbol that does not reach and a symbol that is offset by one symbol) are also determined.

  The production control CPU 90120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the variation number counter for counting the number of times the variation display of the decorative pattern has been performed since the game machine was powered on (step 150IWS603). In this example, since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by power supply, the value of the variation counter stored in the RAM 90122 is cleared when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the game is played. It is assumed that the value of the variation counter is 0 when the machine is powered on.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes in-game suggestive effect determination processing for determining the presence / absence of in-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS604).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a puzzle effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of a puzzle effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS605).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 selects a process table according to the suggestion during game and the puzzle effect if the variation pattern and execution of the suggestion during game or the puzzle effect are determined (step 150IWS606). . Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 150IWS607).

  The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 90120 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 905 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation forming the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern are described. Specifically, the data regarding the change of the display screen of the image display device 905 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in a variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

  If execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 150IWS604, a process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 is selected in accordance with the selected process table. And the effect display during variable display (step S90172) is executed, so that the suggestion during game is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  If execution of the puzzle effect is decided in the puzzle effect setting process of step 150IWS605, a process table including the puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 and variable display effect process according to the selected process table. By executing (step S90172), the puzzle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (image display device 905 as an effect part, an effect part. Control of various lamps and speakers 908L and 908R as effect parts is executed (step 150IWS608).

  In the characteristic unit 150IW, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. However, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 150IWS609). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 150IWS610), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
FIG. 54-22 is a flowchart showing an example of in-game suggestive effect determination processing (step 150IWS604). The game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S90171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 90120 is in the special period (Y in step 150IWS701), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS702) and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 150IWS701), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS703). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 150IWS701 whether or not the special period is in progress.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS704). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120, based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122, Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestive effect is determined by using the selected in-game suggestive effect determination table (step 150IWS705).

  54-23 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 54-23 (B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

  As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has higher reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

  Also, in the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect having a high reliability is executed only during the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game for a special period, and to enhance the interest.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appears) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is "3".

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS706). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table as the set value “1” and determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode ( Step 150 IWS707).

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS706 to S707, the characteristic unit 150IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B), with respect to the setting value “1”, the rate itself for executing the in-game suggestion effect is low, and the rate is determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS708). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS709).

  FIG. 54-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 54-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS708 to S709, the characteristic unit 150IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 directly ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS708, in the feature unit 150IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, by not performing the in-game suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by executing the suggestive effect during game, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

  In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is determined that the value is the setting value 2 or the setting value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

  In the present characteristic part 150IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion during game at different rates according to the set value, but this is the suggestion during game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the second effect mode according to the set value). (Including 3 effect modes), different execution ratios of the 1st effect mode, 2nd effect mode, and 3rd effect mode depending on the set value, only specific effect modes depending on the set value This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  It should be noted that the feature section 150IW is configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, a different mode suggestive effect may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the presence / absence of execution of in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are configured to be different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and a set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

  For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when the change pattern includes at least the reach effect (that is, the change time is longer than the non-reach change pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter has a higher ratio of executing the in-game suggestive effect. Alternatively, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed is increased and the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed is increased. It may be higher.

  Further, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than that in the former), the former has a higher percentage of execution of the in-game suggestive effect. It may be set higher, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio in which the suggestive effect during game is executed. The reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, and the reliability when the inside suggestion effect is executed may be increased. .

(Puzzle production setting process)
54-24 and 54-25 are flowcharts showing an example of the puzzle effect setting process (step 150IWS605). In the puzzle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms whether or not a puzzle completion flag indicating that any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 has been completed is set (step 150IWS801). If the puzzle completion flag is set, the puzzle effect setting process ends.

  By executing the processing of step 150 IWS801, in this example, a puzzle effect may be executed until one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is completed after the power of the game machine is turned on. When any one of the puzzles is completed, the puzzle effect is not executed thereafter (that is, only one puzzle is completed, and two or more puzzles are not completed).

  In addition, you may comprise so that two or more puzzles may be completed, without being restricted to the aspect shown in this example.

  If the puzzle completion flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the puzzle effect determination table for determining whether to execute the puzzle effect, and executes the puzzle effect. It is determined whether or not (step 150 IWS802). FIG. 54-26 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the puzzle effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 54-26, in this example, it is determined that the puzzle effect is executed with a probability of 1% when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed.

  Generally, in a game store, when a game is continuously played between the opening of the game store and the closing of the game store, it is possible to perform a variable display of the decorative design approximately 3000 times at the maximum (however, the game machine is displayed). There is a difference depending on the model). In this example, the maximum number of pieces of each of the puzzles 1 to 3 is 5, and when any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 has 5 pieces, the puzzle is completed. In this example, even if the puzzle does not have all the pieces, the judgment values are assigned so that it is easy to get the pieces up to 3 to 4 pieces, so that it is possible to complete one of the puzzles 1 to 3. It takes about 11 to 13 times to execute the puzzle effect, and since the determination rate for executing the puzzle effect is 1%, it generally takes about 1100 to 1300 times to perform the variable display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, in this example, after the amusement shop is opened, it is designed that one of the puzzles will be completed in about the afternoon. The puzzle may be completed in the morning without being limited to such an aspect.

  In this example, the case of using one type of puzzle effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-26 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, different puzzle effect determination tables may be used to change the puzzle effect execution ratio according to the time of day, the number of times of variable display execution, and the setting by the game shop staff.

  Further, in this example, the case where the maximum number of pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and is, for example, 3 pieces, 4 pieces, or 6 pieces or more. It may be configured to exist. Further, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 does not necessarily have to be the same number. For example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 1 is four, while the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 3 is five. The maximum number of pieces may differ for each puzzle.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the puzzle effect (step 150IWS803). If it is decided not to execute the puzzle effect, the puzzle effect setting process is ended as it is. When it is determined to execute the puzzle effect, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (step 150IWS804). If the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (that is, if the variation display of the decorative pattern from the power-on of the game machine is executed 1000 times or less), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. The puzzle effect mode determination table A is selected as a table for determination (step 150IWS805).

  If the value of the variation counter is not less than 1000 (that is, if the variation display of the decorative pattern from the power-on of the game machine is greater than 1000), the effect control CPU 90120 stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. It is confirmed whether or not the set value being set is the set value “1” (step 150 IWS806). If the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 90120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table B as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS807).

  If the setting value is not "1", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the setting value "2" (step 150IWS808). If the setting value is "2", the effect control CPU 90120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table C as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS809).

  If it is neither the set value “2” (that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value “3”), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As the table, the puzzle effect mode determination table D is selected (step 150IWS810).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the puzzle effect mode determination table selected in steps 150IWS805, S807, S809, and S810 to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS811).

  54-27 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table. Of these, FIG. 54-27 (A) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table A selected in step 150IWS805. Further, FIG. 54-27 (B) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table B selected in step 150IWS807. Also, FIG. 54-27 (C) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table C selected in step 150IWS809. Further, FIG. 54-27 (D) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table D selected in step 150IWS810.

  As shown in FIG. 54-27, in each of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the determination values for puzzle effect 1, puzzle effect 2, and puzzle effect 3 as the effect mode (type) of the puzzle effect, respectively. Has been allocated. The puzzle effect 1 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which one of the puzzles 1 to 3 of the puzzle 1 is increased. Further, the puzzle effect 2 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which one of the puzzles 1 to 3 of the puzzles 1 to 3 is increased. Further, the puzzle effect 3 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 out of the puzzles 1 to 3 is increased by one.

  As shown in FIG. 54-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 3% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, the percentage of the puzzle effect 3 being executed and the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 being increased by 1 is slightly high. Therefore, in the present example, for example, even if the set value that has been set is the set value "1" which is low in the degree of advantage, the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 having the high degree of advantage is up to a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4). Are easy to get together.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (B), in the puzzle effect mode determination table B, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 1 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 2 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "1", the puzzle effect 1 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which one piece increases by one is slightly higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (C), in the puzzle effect mode determination table C, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 2 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the setting value is set to "2", the puzzle effect 2 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which 2 pieces increase by 1 is slightly higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (D), in the puzzle effect mode determination table D, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 3 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the setting value is set to "3", the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which the number of 3 pieces increases by 1 is slightly higher.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 54-27, in any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3 as compared with the other puzzle effects. Since it is only high, it is easy to collect all the pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 to some extent, and it is a puzzle other than the puzzle in which the maximum number (5 pieces in this example) of puzzles 1 to 3 is finally prepared. However, it is configured so that at least 3 to 4 pieces can be easily aligned.

  Note that the method of configuring the puzzle effect mode determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect using different puzzle effect mode determination tables according to the settings of the game shop staff, and to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the puzzle effect. May be. For example, depending on the setting, the pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 may be evenly arranged to some extent, or a particular puzzle may be made to have pieces more easily than other puzzles or may be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 1 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS812). When the puzzle effect 1 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the setting value “1” (step 150IWS813). If the set value is “1”, the process directly proceeds to step 150 IWS815.

  If the setting value is not "1", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the first piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS814). If the value of the first piece counter is 4, the process proceeds to step 150IWS819 without proceeding to the process of steps 150IWS815 to S818. That is, in this case, the value of the first piece counter is 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 1 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 1 is executed, the fifth piece is gathered and the puzzle 1 is collected. Although it will be completed, since the set value that is set is not the set value "1" and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, steps 150IWS815- It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S818.

  When the setting value is "1" (Y in step 150IWS813) or the value of the first piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS814), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 1 is executed. The puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set (step 150IWS815). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 1 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS 608 and the variable display effect process (step S90172), the puzzle effect 1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The puzzle effect 1 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the first piece counter (step 150IWS816), and confirms whether the value of the first piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS817). If the value of the first piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS818).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS819). When the puzzle effect 2 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the setting value “2” (step 150IWS820). If the setting value is "2", the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS822.

  If the setting value is not "2", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the second piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS821). If the value of the second piece counter is 4, the process proceeds to step 150IWS826 without proceeding to the process of steps 150IWS822 to S825. That is, in this case, the value of the second piece counter is 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 2 have been gathered, and when the puzzle effect 2 is executed, the fifth piece is gathered and the puzzle 2 is collected. Although it will be completed, the set value that is set is not the set value "2", and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value. It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S825.

  When the set value is "2" (Y in step 150IWS820) or the value of the second piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS821), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 2 is executed. The puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set (step 150IWS82). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 2 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S90172), the puzzle effect 2 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The puzzle effect 2 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the second piece counter (step 150IWS823), and confirms whether the value of the second piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS824). If the value of the second piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS825).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 3 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS826). When the puzzle effect 3 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value “3” (step 150IWS827). If the set value is “3”, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS829.

  If the set value is not "3", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the third piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS828). If the value of the third piece counter is 4, the process of steps 150IWS829 to S832 is not performed and the puzzle effect setting process is ended. That is, in this case, the value of the third piece counter is 4, which means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 3 have been gathered, and when the puzzle effect 3 is executed, the fifth piece is gathered to form the puzzle 3. Although it will be completed, since the set value that is set is not the set value “3” and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set set value, step 150 IWS829- It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S832.

  When the set value is "3" (Y in step 150IWS827) or the value of the third piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS828), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 3 is executed. The puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set (step 150IWS829). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 3 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S90172), the puzzle effect 3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The puzzle effect 3 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the third piece counter (step 150IWS830), and confirms whether the value of the third piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS831). If the value of the third piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS832).

  In this example, the processing of steps 150 IWS813, S814, S820, S821, S827, and S828 does not match the set value suggested by the completed puzzle with the actually set value. In such a case, the puzzle effect is canceled to prevent such a situation from occurring, but the processing mode is not limited thereto. For example, step 150IWS811 may be executed again, and the production mode of the puzzle production may be determined again until the production mode of the puzzle production that does not cause such a mismatch is determined. Further, for example, it may be configured to redetermine the effect mode of the puzzle effect by using a table excluding the effect mode of the puzzle effect that causes such a mismatch.

  In addition, in this example, the control is performed so that the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set do not coincide with each other. Instead, the set value suggested in the completed puzzle may not necessarily match the set value actually set. For example, when the set value is “3”, the rate of completion of the puzzle 3 is highest, but the puzzle 1 and the puzzle 2 may be completed in some cases.

  Also for the puzzle effect, check whether the set value command reception flag is set (whether or not the set value command is normally received), and if the set value command is not normally received, the game is played. The execution of the puzzle effect may be limited similarly to the determination of the previous suggestion effect, the suggestion effect during game, and the suggestion effect during big hit.

(Direction determination process during big hit)
FIG. 54-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit midtime effect determination process. The big hit midtime performance determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S90114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS901). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120, based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122, Whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when it is executed are determined (step 150IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  In step S150IWS902, if the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the number shown in FIG. When the one big hit medium suggestive effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-29 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the last series of games. It may be the time when the display is started or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit medium suggestive effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestive effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

  In the first and second big hit medium suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B), the big hit medium suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

  Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, during the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and to increase interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic unit 150IW, the suggestive effect during big hit (or a particular effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the set value is "3" by executing the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode.

  In the present feature part 150IW, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (A1), the decoration pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 905. After that, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (B1), a dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 150IW102 is displayed.

  Further, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (A1), after the decorative design which is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 905, As shown in 54-31 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 150IW105 is displayed.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU90120 for use confirms whether the present production mode is production mode A (step 150IWS903). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the set value is “1” and determines whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect using the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table (the effect mode). Step 150 IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS903 to S904, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the suggestion during big hit and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B), the setting value “1” has the lowest ratio determined as the second effect mode and the third effect mode, and is determined as the fourth effect mode. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player. It is possible to reduce the number of accidents and prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS905). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the effect during the big hit and the effect mode, by using the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  FIG. 54-29 (C) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 54-29 (C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the rate itself for determining the big hit medium suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS905 to S906, the characteristic unit 150IW sets an unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode C is set. Despite that, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds directly to step 150IWS907. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS905, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, by not performing the big hit medium suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged due to the execution of a suggestion during a big hit, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect during the big hit.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 54-29 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54-29 (B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the suggestion during big hit is not executed is configured to be the same, but the proportion not executed is different depending on the set value. You may allow it.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 150IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, a big hit mid-range suggestion effect is configured to be executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

  In the feature part 150IW, the big hit medium suggestion effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit medium suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). Execution ratios (including the production mode and the fourth production mode) are different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set values, and the set values are set. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 150IWS907).

  Here, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 54-30 (A1), the movable member 150IW101 is provided above the image display device 905. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 150IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 905 is performed as shown in FIG. 54-30 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 54-30 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory production is executed, the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 905. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature section 150IW, since the big hit medium suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 150IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 905 is the big hit. The serif image displayed by the medium suggestion is not obscured. However, during the fanfare period, when the movable member 150IW101 operates due to the effect production, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 150IW101 and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion production may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 150IWS907, by using the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-29 (D), the character effect is not executed when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-range suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-range suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

  In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect indication is performed. It is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 150IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is determined, the execution ratio of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 54-29 (D), the character effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence / absence of the light guide plate effect if the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 150IWS908) (step 150IWS909).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 905, a light-transmitting light guide plate 150IW103 capable of transmitting light and a light-emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that a light emitting member is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate 150IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 150IW103 and emits the light to the front surface of the game machine. Then, it is possible to perform a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided in the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, and the "big hit" is given. Appears. Further, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 905.

  In step 150IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-29 (E), the light guide plate effects are executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the big hit suggestive effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the large-hit mid-hit suggestion of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effects being executed is high, and the second-hit mid-hit suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode is suggested. When the effect is performed, the light guide plate effect is configured to be executed at a low rate. That is, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 150IW104 is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having a bad interest in the game due to a suggestion during a big hit, which is an undesirable effect for the player. When the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestive effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

  Next, an aspect of the puzzle effect will be described. 54-32 to 54-34 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As shown in FIG. 54-32 (A), in the variable display of the decorative design for which the execution of the puzzle effect has not been decided, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed on the image display device 905, and the left middle right decorative pattern is displayed. The fluctuation display of is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-32 (B), the variation time is ended and the stop symbol of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 54-32 (C), the next variation of the decorative design. It is assumed that the display has started. In the example shown in FIG. 54-32 (C), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the execution of the puzzle effect is determined and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-32 (C), for example, an effect screen (puzzle effect screen) 150IW106 for puzzle effect is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen of the image display device 905, and the puzzle effect is started.

  54-32 (D) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 shown in FIG. 54-32 (C). As shown in FIG. 54-32 (D), puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displays puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3). Also, in the example shown in FIG. 54-32 (D), one piece 150IW107-1 is already collected in the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), and one piece is still collected in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2). However, the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) shows a case where two pieces have already been gathered.

  Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 54-33 (E), one new piece 150IW108-1 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is created that encourages which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-33 (F), the new piece 150IW108-1 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) increases by one. The performance is executed. Then, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is erased and the puzzle effect is ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54-33 (G), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect has not been decided in the variable display of the next decorative design, and the image display device is shown as shown in FIG. 54-33 (G). In 905, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed, but the variable display of the left middle right decorative design is displayed.

  Then, thereafter, the puzzle effect is not executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 54-33 (H). It is assumed to be in a state. In this example, when the customer waiting demonstration is displayed, as shown in FIG. 54-33 (H), for example, a puzzle display display screen (puzzle display screen) 150IW110 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 905. Then, the display of the puzzle display is started, and the current state of collection of pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is displayed.

  After that, the game is started again, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed a plurality of times, and the puzzle effect is also executed a plurality of times. Then, when the variable display of a certain decorative pattern is started thereafter, it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect has been determined and the puzzle effect 2 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect, and the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is displayed. It is assumed that the puzzle production has started. 54-34 (I) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displayed in the variable display of the decorative design. In the example shown in FIG. 54-34 (I), the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) has already gathered three pieces 150IW107-1, and the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) has already gathered four pieces. The puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) shows a case where four pieces have already been gathered.

  Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 54-34 (J), one new piece 150IW108-5 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is created that encourages which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-34 (K), the new piece 150IW108-5 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) increases by one. The performance is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54-34 (K), the maximum number of pieces in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is 5 and the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is completed. Therefore, the image display device 905 is completed. At, a character display such as "Puzzle 2 completed!" Is displayed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-34 (L), the letter "2" also appears in the completed puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2), and the set value being set is the set value "2". Is suggested.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54-34 (L), the number “2” is displayed to directly suggest that the setting value is “2”. I can't stop. For example, instead of such a direct expression, a picture corresponding to the setting value "2" (a picture reminiscent of the setting value "2") is displayed by being completed when the puzzle is completed. May be

  54-32 to 54-34 show the case where the puzzle 2 is completed and it is suggested that the set value is "2", but the set value "1" and the set value "3" are suggested. When performing, the puzzle effect is executed in the same effect mode.

  In the feature unit 150IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 905 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the big hit suggestive effect (or the pre-game suggestive effect or the in-game suggestive effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In the case where a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit medium suggestion effect (for example, a specific effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestion effect In addition, the suggestion during big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 905 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, it is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. The image may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 150IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 905, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern on the surface. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern on its surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type game machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting is changed (or Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first variation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the variation may be executed (or the execution rate may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 150IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect by executing the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. Further, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to another person to reduce the visibility (or make it less noticeable) of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

  In addition to the setting suggestion effect of the characteristic unit 150IW, a simultaneous effect that is executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer or the real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific mode. Therefore, the setting may be suggested.

  In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the holding memory becoming 0, or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit holding memory number (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

  In addition, during a predetermined operation valid period, setting suggestive effect suggesting the setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

  The characteristic part 150IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic part 150IW, the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 150IW001a by way of example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side. Good. Specifically, as a first modification, as shown in FIGS. 54-35 (A) and 54-35 (B), a security cover 150IW500B including a short piece 150IW500Ba and a long piece 150IW500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the substrate case 150IW201. The right end of the long piece 150IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position for covering the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to set through the through hole 150IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 150IW500Bb. The key 150IW051 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the sliding movement in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 150IW201 is performed with the security cover 150IW500B (long piece 150IW500Bb) covering the setting key 150IW051. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered, so that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is released. The restricted state can be released (can be changed to the permitted state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 54-35 (A) and 54-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the substrate case 150IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 150IW500B with respect to the board case 150IW201, the protruding dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 54-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 150IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 150IW201. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is set by the store clerk or the like operating the setting key 150IW051 by sliding the board case 150IW201 until it reaches the length L2 (making the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state). Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 54-36 (B), the security cover 150IW500B is attached to the board case 150IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 150IW201 becomes the length L1. Unless it is slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the regulated state), the security cover 150IW500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. Has become.

  For this reason, in this modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the allowed state, and thus the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500B. Forgetting to do so, that is, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 150IW001a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 150IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the setting key 150IW051 is kept covered by the security cover 150IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. Between a covering position for covering the right side portion of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and a covering releasing position rotated from the covering position around the pivot 150IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 150IW003 and oriented in the vertical direction. It may be pivotally supported by. In such a case, when closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 150IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 150IW001a, and the long piece 150IW500Cb pushes the setting key 150IW051 to the rear side. The rotation from the state of being covered to the back side may be restricted.

  When the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. Then, it can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the security cover 150IW500C (long piece 150IW500Cb) is restricted from rotating with the setting key 150IW051 being covered, whereby the pachinko gaming machine is controlled. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be brought into a state in which it can be released (can be changed to an allowable state) from the restricted state.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-38 (A), the security cover 150IW500C in the present modification 2 rotates around the pivot 150IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 901 in an allowable state), thereby The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by a store clerk or the like operating the setting key 150IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 54-38 (B), the security cover 150IW500C is rotated clockwise in plan view and the security cover 150IW500C sets a key. Unless the 150IW051 is covered (the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not changed to the regulated state), the security cover 150IW500C abuts on the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, and the gaming machine frame 150IW003 cannot be closed. Has become.

  For this reason, in this modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500C. Forgetting to do so, that is, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, an example in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a glass door frame. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be changeable by opening the 150IW003a. Incidentally, in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 150IW003a in this way, a modified example 3 is shown in FIGS. 54-39 (A) to 54-39 (C). As described above, the through hole 150IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, and the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through hole 150IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 9011 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the setting key 150IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 9011 opposite to the mounting surface. .

  In this way, when the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through hole 150IW003b, a door body 150IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 150IW003b is provided, and when the door body 150IW003c is closed, the setting key 150IW051 The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 54-39 (B) and 54-39 (C), when the door body 150IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 150IW003a. Since 150IW003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 150IW003a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003 so that it can be opened and closed, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 150IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed. Therefore, security can be improved.

As described above, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the following first invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902. . Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed and a process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. Further, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol is changed, but it may be more regular (at the time of total change, every predetermined number of changes, etc.) or irregular (when a random number is drawn). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, the effect is not always achieved. Can not be raised. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, puzzle effect) (for example, step 150IWS606 in effect control CPU 90120 selects a process table including puzzle effect, and executes step 150IWS608 and effect during variable display effect step (step S90172). Part to be executed)
The suggestive effect execution means,
When a display in which a plurality of specific constituent elements (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) are gathered is performed, the specific suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the effect in which the set value “1” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the above) to complete the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1),
When a display in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) are gathered is performed, the special suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the effect in which the set value “3” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the individual piece) to complete the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3),
A display in which the specific constituent elements and the special constituent elements are gathered is displayed in a different manner according to the set value that is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (B), when the set value is “1”) , The execution rate of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) are likely to be a little gathered. , The percentage of execution of the puzzle effect 3 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are likely to be slightly gathered.)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player has a staging effect. Can be increased.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the first invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, puzzle effect) (for example, step 150IWS606 in effect control CPU 90120 selects a process table including puzzle effect, and executes step 150IWS608 and effect during variable display effect step (step S90172). Part to be executed)
The suggestive effect execution means,
When a display in which a plurality of specific constituent elements (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) are gathered is performed, the specific suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the effect in which the set value “1” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the above) to complete the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1),
When a display in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) are gathered is performed, the special suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the effect in which the set value “3” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the individual piece) to complete the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3),
The specific component and the special component are displayed in a different manner according to the set value that is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (B), when the set value is “1”). , The execution rate of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) are likely to gather a little. Further, for example, when the set value is “3” as shown in FIG. Indicates that the execution rate of the puzzle effect 3 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) tend to be slightly gathered together.),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
In a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state), a promotion informing means (an effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) for executing a promotion informing that the game medium is won in the prize winning device.
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notifying means (outputting control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting "arrival" etc.), and according to this characteristic, a player In the gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages, it is possible to enhance the effect. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

  In this example, the case where an image such as a puzzle piece is displayed as the specific component or the special component is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the sound of various musical instruments may be output as a specific component or a special component, and the set value set by the sound output sounds may be suggested.

  In addition, in this example, as a specific example of a mode in which "the display in which the specific constituent element and the special constituent element are gathered according to a different mode depending on the set value" is performed, as shown in FIGS. Although a case has been described in which the puzzle pieces corresponding to the set values are configured to be easily collected, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on the set value, it is different whether or not the puzzles are collected up to the maximum value (5 in this example) to complete the puzzle, the way in which the puzzle pieces are collected up to the middle is different, Various modes are conceivable, such as changing the ease of acquiring pieces.

  Further, in this example, the case where the puzzle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern and the puzzle pieces are collected is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that some puzzle effect is executed during the big hit game and the puzzle pieces are collected.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the specific suggestive effect, while the special suggestive effect cannot be executed, when the set value being set is the specific set value (for example, the set value “1”). If Y in step 150IWS813, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute puzzle effects 1 by executing steps 150IWS815 to S818, but if N in step 150IWS813 and Y in step 150IWS814, step 150IWS815. ~ Cancel the puzzle effect without shifting to S818)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect Can be increased.

  In this example, if the setting value is "1", it is ensured that only puzzle 1 is completed, and if the setting value is "2", there is no possibility that puzzles other than puzzle 2 are completed. In the case where the setting value is “3”, the case where the puzzles other than the puzzle 3 are not completed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the setting value "1" having a particularly low profitability is set, the puzzle 3 corresponding to the setting value "3" having a high profitability is restricted from being completed, and in other cases, it is actually restricted. The puzzles other than the puzzle corresponding to the set value may be completed in some cases.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
Whether or not the suggestion effect executing means performs the display for collecting the specific constituent elements or the special constituent elements based on that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the lottery process for presence / absence of the puzzle effect in step 150IWS802 is won). Production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 54-33 (E) and 54-34 (J), one new piece has flown, and it has become one of puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3). It is described that a production effect that encourages whether or not a new puzzle fits may be executed. According to such a configuration, any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is described. In the gaming machine that can be set to the set value, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which one new piece flies, and an effect is executed to fuel which one of the puzzles 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) to 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits in. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if you perform an effect that stirs whether or not you can acquire a piece, or if you perform an effect that displays multiple pieces and then decides which of those pieces can be acquired. Well, various embodiments are possible.

  In addition, in this example, as the “predetermined condition”, the case where the lottery process is performed for each variable display and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the lottery process is won is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the puzzle effect may be executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established based on a big hit, or the puzzle effect may be executed based on the appearance of a predetermined notice effect. Various modes are conceivable as the predetermined condition.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can perform a display for collecting the specific component and the special component regardless of the set value being set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 54-27). In any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3% higher than that of the other puzzle effects, so that any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is executed. Pieces are easy to gather to some extent)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means performs a display (for example, a puzzle display screen 150IW110 shown in FIG. 54-33 (H)) capable of confirming the states of the specific constituent elements and the special constituent elements being collected (for example, for effect control). (Part of CPU 120 that executes step 150 IWS518)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted. That is, in this example, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by showing the state of the puzzle pieces being collected. In particular, in this example, when the number of fluctuations is 1000 times or less, puzzle pieces corresponding to the highly advantageous setting value “3” are likely to be gathered, so that the setting is highly advantageous to the player. It can be expected that the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

  In this example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration display to confirm the acquisition status of each puzzle piece and the completed puzzle status. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the acquisition status of the pieces of each puzzle and the status of the completed puzzle may be incorporated into the interface screen and constantly displayed so that the puzzle status can be constantly checked.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
Even if the set value that has been set is a set value with a low degree of advantage, the suggestive effect execution means performs a display in which a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4) of special components corresponding to the high degree of advantage are gathered. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 2 as compared with the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. It is 3% higher, and after turning on the game machine, until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the rate at which the number of pieces in the puzzle 3 increases by one is slightly high.)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
An information output unit (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) can be executed (for example, step in effect control CPU 120). 150 IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, it is assumed that the RAM 90122 mounted on the production control board 9012 is not backed up with power, and the value of each piece counter is reset when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and the power is restored. When throwing in, each puzzle shall be started in a reset state. It should be noted that at least a part of the RAM 90122 may be backed up with a power source to backup the value of each piece counter or the like. In this case, each piece counter stored in the RAM 90122 may be stored in response to a reset operation by a game shop clerk. The value may be reset.

Further, in the above case, for example, the game machine may be configured to start up when some pieces of some puzzles are gathered when the game shop is opened. Further, in this case, the set value may be suggested depending on which puzzle piece is started up in a gathered state. In addition, there may be a pattern in which the game machine is activated when one of the puzzles is already completed when the game shop is opened.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 7 of the first invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the first invention described above.

The characteristic portion 150IW includes the following second invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902. . Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. It is also described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change processing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM90122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value, a process execution means for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 150IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 90100). S034 and S048 are executed) and a gaming machine is described. According to this feature, any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is set. The processing can be suitably performed in the game machine configured to be settable. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, by storing the specific information (in this example, the RAM clear flag), confirming the RAM clear flag, and executing the process, it is possible to suitably perform the process. It can be performed.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, a clear switch) provided to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. )When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM90122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value, a process execution means for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 150IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 90100). S034 and S048 are executed),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
In a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state), a promotion informing means (an effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) for executing a promotion informing that the game medium is won in the prize winning device.
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notifying means (outputting control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting "arrival" etc.), and according to this characteristic, a player For a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages, it is possible to preferably perform processing. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, by storing the specific information (in this example, the RAM clear flag), confirming the RAM clear flag, and executing the process, it is possible to suitably perform the process. It can be performed. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

It should be noted that, in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, a mode of the promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device, or that the number of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number in the predetermined period. The set value may be suggested by the mode of arrival notification shown. For example, while selecting the mode of promotion notification or the mode of arrival notification from among a plurality of types by lottery, etc., the selection ratio of each notification mode of promotion notification or the selection ratio of each notification mode of arrival notification is set according to the set value. By making the setting different, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the easier it is to perform the notification in the specific type of notification mode. By doing so, the notification mode of the promotion notification and the arrival notification can be varied, and the player can be given an opportunity to infer the set value based on the appearance ratio of each notification mode, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. You can
Further, when performing the promotion notification and the arrival notification, the set value suggesting effect may be performed by the effect display device. For example, a character is displayed on the effect display device when the promotion notification or the arrival notification is performed, and the character is selected from among a plurality of types each time the promotion notification or the arrival notification is executed by a lottery or the like, and the set value is set. By making the selection ratio of each character different, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is for the effect of the specific type of character to be performed in the promotion notification and the arrival notification. By doing so, the set value suggestion effect will be performed when the promotion notification or the arrival notification is executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In this example, as a process to be executed “using specific information multiple times”, a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 150IWS026 and S027 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS025. Control, whether to execute the process of changing the setting value of step 150IWS035 to S042 according to whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS034, or to clear the RAM in step 150IWS048. The case where the restoration process or the RAM clear 1 process of steps 150IWS049 and S051 is executed depending on whether the flag is set is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, whether or not the operation switch is enabled may be controlled immediately before the operation of changing the set value depending on whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value in the set value change processing based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps 150IWS039 to S042).
It is described that such a configuration may be adopted, and according to such a configuration, the operating means can also be used, so that an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 90102 and the operation means for changing the set value, an increase in cost can be suppressed. it can.

  In this example, by using the clear switch also, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when turning on the power to the gaming machine, so the clear switch should be turned on first when turning on the power to the gaming machine. When it is detected, the RAM clear flag is set, and thereafter, whether or not the RAM clear flag is set is checked to see if the clear switch for initializing the RAM 90102 is operated. The operation of the clear switch for the changing operation is performed by confirming the state of the clear switch itself so that the processing can be appropriately performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
A normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, an initialization process executing means for executing an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 90100) )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion for executing step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 90100),
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the set value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 can execute step 150IWS041). If Y, execute step 150IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to an ON state (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100). Executes step 150IWS037 when N is determined in step 150IWS036)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
A timer interrupt processing execution means capable of executing a timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt is generated (for example, a portion executing steps S9021 to S9027 in the game control microcomputer 90100),
The processing execution means executes the processing by using the specific information a plurality of times until the timer interrupt processing is executed after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 90100, Steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048 are executed)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effects, in-game suggestive effects, big hit suggestive effects) (for example, step in effect control CPU 90120). 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.
The game machines of means 2 to 6 of the second invention that can be applied to the game machine of means 1 of the second invention described above can also be applied to the game machine of means A of the second invention described above.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the following third invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-60546. . Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546 describes that when the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch),
Process execution means capable of executing a set value changing process for changing the set value based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100 (the part that executes steps 150 IWS039 to S042),
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes step 150IWS041). Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the setting value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 can execute the step If Y in 150IWS041, execute step 150IWS042),
The determining means determines whether or not the operating means is operated by setting the state of the operating means for the first time when the setting value changing process is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 is , If N in step 150IWS036, execute step 150IWS037)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is preferably processed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the setting value is unintentionally changed, even if the operating means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the third invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-60546,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch),
Process execution means capable of executing a set value changing process for changing the set value based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100 (the part that executes steps 150 IWS039 to S042),
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes step 150IWS041). Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the setting value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 can execute the step If Y in 150IWS041, execute step 150IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the setting value change processing is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 is , If step 150IWS036 is N, execute step 150IWS037),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
In a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state), a promotion informing means (an effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) for executing a promotion informing that the game medium is won in the prize winning device.
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notifying means (outputting control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting "arrival" etc.), and according to this characteristic, a player For a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages, it is possible to preferably perform processing. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the setting value is unintentionally changed, even if the operating means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage unit (for example, a RAM 90122) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating unit has been operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including the setting value changing process, the process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, executes steps 150IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 90100). Part)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
A normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, an initialization process executing means for executing an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 90100) )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
First state storage means (for example, a previous clear switch buffer) that stores the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the operating means this time,
The determining means can determine that the operating means has been operated based on that the stored content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the stored content of the second state storage means is in the on state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the setting value change processing is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS037).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effects, in-game suggestive effects, big hit suggestive effects) (for example, step in effect control CPU 90120). 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the third invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the third invention described above.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in game control microcomputer 90100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90114 to S90117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108). ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 90120 executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the fourth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in game control microcomputer 90100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90114 to S90117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108). ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 90120 executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
If the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904).
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notifying means (output control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting "arrival" etc.), and according to this characteristic, it is set. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS047, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table). A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion in the effect control CPU 90120 that executes steps 150 IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122). Steps 150 IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set values that are set),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the decision data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 90120). Executes steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904 based on the setting value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent an increase in data capacity.

  In the feature unit 150IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggested effect" includes determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect, and also includes determining the effect mode of the suggested effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, or the like, depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for a predetermined period of time and to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification unit (for example, a portion for which the CPU 90120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 54-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion production is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs according to a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
An opening / closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated. On the other hand, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 5B is released, and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 12 of the fourth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention described above.

In addition, the characteristic portion 150IW also includes the following fifth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in game control microcomputer 90100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90114 to S90117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108). ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 90120 executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect executing unit limits the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is N in step 150IWS514, and in S708). When N in S, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in game control microcomputer 90100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90114 to S90117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108). ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 90120 executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect executing unit limits the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines N in step 150IWS514 and S708). N, when N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notifying means (output control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting "arrival" etc.), and according to this characteristic, it is set. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS047, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, or the like, depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for a predetermined period of time and to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification unit (for example, a portion for which the CPU 90120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 54-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion production is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs according to a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
An opening / closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated. On the other hand, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 5B is released, and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 11 of the fifth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention described above.

The characteristic portion 150IW also includes the sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in game control microcomputer 90100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90114 to S90117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108). ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 90120 executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, By performing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the sixth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in game control microcomputer 90100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90114 to S90117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108). ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 90120 executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, The effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode by executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notifying means (output control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting "arrival" etc.), and according to this characteristic, it is set. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS047, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table). A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion in the effect control CPU 90120 that executes steps 150 IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122). Steps 150 IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set values that are set),
If the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table in step 150IWS515. , S709, S906 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, or the like, depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for a predetermined period of time and to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification unit (for example, a portion for which the CPU 90120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 54-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion production is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs according to a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
An opening / closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated. On the other hand, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 5B is released, and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 12 of the sixth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention described above.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, it is configured to be able to change to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the setting value information is not normally input when the effect mode A is controlled, The player is configured to be able to perform the suggestive effect as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the above-described fourth invention), and is set to the set value if the effect mode B is controlled. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-mentioned configuration of the fifth invention), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is configured to be executable as the suggestive effect (the above-mentioned sixth invention configuration). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any of the above-mentioned fourth invention to sixth invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, the suggestive effect can be executed assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the game state is a time saving state, if the set value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestive effect is limited (from the above-mentioned fifth invention. If the game state is a probability change state and the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect ( The configuration of the above sixth invention) may be performed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention described above, and it is possible to execute the suggestive effect by using only one control method. Good.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 150IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to missing or garbled data, the control method of the above-described fourth invention to sixth invention controls execution of the suggestive effect. Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the set value command is received, but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, each time the set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, When the set value indicated by the set value command received in step 1 and the previously stored set value do not match, it is determined that the inconsistency has occurred, and execution of the suggestive effect is performed by the control method of the above fourth invention to sixth invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

  Further, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, if the set value is an odd number such as “1” or “3”, the consecutive villas (when big hits continuously occur during the probability change state) are likely to occur and the consecutive villas occur. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and in the case of even-numbered setting values such as the setting value "2", it is configured so that the likelihood of a condominium is relatively constant and does not change. The suggestive effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the above-mentioned fourth invention to sixth invention. It may be configured to perform (limit suggestive effects).

  Further, the control method for executing the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fourth invention to the sixth invention is not normally received can also be applied to the puzzle effect as the suggestion effect.

The seventh aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect before game) at a ratio different depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is described that the gaming machine is characterized by being capable of executing (or initial performance), and according to this characteristic, the gaming machine is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the gaming machine is played from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the seventh invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect before game) at a ratio different depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. And initial appearance production)
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notifying means (output control microcomputer 100, etc.) for executing notification (outputting “arrival”, etc.), and according to this characteristic, a game is started. It is possible to give interest to the state of the previous gaming machine and give a motivation to play the game from an early time period, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (for example, a decorative pattern),
The suggestion effect execution means, in the period from the setting value is changed until the first variable display is executed, the suggestion effect display information different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value being set (for example, It is described that the odd number initial display result) may be executed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 54). As shown in -20 (A) and (B), pre-game suggestive effect determination tables with different determination values are used)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute a specific suggestive effect (for example, suggestive effect during game play, suggestive effect during big hit, etc.) that suggests the set value that has been set, after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 90103 is a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the seventh invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention described above.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW also includes the eighth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect execution means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance amusement of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect execution means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B)),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notification means (such as production control microcomputer 100) for executing notification (outputting “arrival”, etc.), and according to this characteristic, a predetermined period The motivation to play a game can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, FIG. 54-6 (A), B))),
It is described that the variable display executing means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A) and (B)),
The variable display execution means can execute the variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect. 54-29 (Fig. 54-29 (Fig. 54-29). The suggestive effect can be executed based on the fact that the notice effect has been executed, or the like. (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 90103 is a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the eighth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention described above.

The ninth aspect of the invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the ninth invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine is described, which further comprises an informing unit (for example, a portion for which the CPU 90120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed. According to this feature, In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the ninth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B)).
In addition, a notification unit (for example, a part for which the CPU 90120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect is further provided,
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notifying means (output control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting “arrival” etc.), and according to this characteristic, in the past, It is possible to confirm the executed suggestive effect and enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the information on the suggested effect that has been executed while waiting for the customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (e.g., execution history information) relating to the executed suggestive effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 905) that displays the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image capturing device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 90103 is a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 6 of the ninth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention described above.

The characteristic portion 150IW also includes the tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (See (D))
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See D)),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by including arrival notification means (output control microcomputer 100, etc.) for executing notification (outputting “arrival”, etc.). The decrease can be prevented. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, executing one of them in the fanfare period and ending the other). Change to run in period)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 54-29 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect does not become difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 150IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, a big hit medium suggestion). Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
The suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 905) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 905),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive performance with priority over the display related to the predetermined performance, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 90103 is a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 6 of the tenth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention described above.

The 11th invention shown below is also included in the characteristic part 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that there is a possibility that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting production which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
A setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (for example, refer to FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. A game machine characterized by further including a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the eleventh invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
A setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (for example, refer to FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is further equipped with hard-to-use feature effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.,
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by including arrival notification means (output control microcomputer 100, etc.) for executing notification (outputting “arrival”, etc.). The decrease can be prevented. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 150IW101). According to such a configuration, , The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the 11th invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 150IW103) having a light-transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection portion that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of presentation.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification for displaying an error. According to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting has been made to the first set value (for example, suggestive presentation during big hit in the first presentation mode. See FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value is set (for example, suggestion during big hit in the third effect mode. FIG. 54-29 ( (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 54-29 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the 11th invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 9031B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated only by the person) so that the settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may perform the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 90103 is a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 8 of the eleventh invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the eleventh invention described above.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW also includes a twelfth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the twelfth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notification means (output control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting "arrival" etc.), and according to this characteristic, gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 54-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value that has been set during the predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value that is set. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of controlling in a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 54-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 90103 is a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The game machines of means 2 to 10 of the twelfth invention applicable to the game machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention described above can also be applied to the game machine of means A of the twelfth invention described above.

The feature section 150IW also includes the thirteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 13th invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 54-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 39),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 54-7),
further,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information relating to variable display that has not been started yet,
A promotion notification means (performance control microcomputer 100 or the like) for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state;
When the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces or the like) of the holding information that can be stored in the holding storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit number has been reached. There is described a gaming machine characterized by comprising arrival notification means (output control microcomputer 100 etc.) for executing notification (outputting "arrival" etc.), and according to this characteristic, gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high. In addition, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 13th invention,
The variable display period differs according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and such a configuration will result in excessive gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 13th invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 90103 is a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 7 of the thirteenth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the thirteenth invention described above.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, the case is shown in which the setting values can be set in three steps of the setting values "1" to "3", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the setting values of, for example, four steps or more are set. It may be configured such that it can be set to a value, or can be set to a two-step set value. In this case, for example, it is configured such that the setting value can be set in 6 steps, and the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the expectation degree (henceforth) when the setting value is "6" ( The reliability may be the highest.

  Further, the configuration shown by the characteristic unit 150IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other characteristic units such as the characteristic unit 31AK to configure a gaming machine. For example, in the case of executing the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect indicated by the characteristic part 150IW, the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect, the title corresponding to the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect may be notified in a manner similar to that of the characteristic part 31AK. .

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 8a ... 1st special symbol display device 8b ... 2nd special symbol display device 9 ... Performance display device 55 ... RAM
96 ... Time saving remaining number image 560 ... Game control microcomputer 901 ... Pachinko gaming machine 902 ... Game board 903 ... Gaming machine frame 904A ... Special symbol display device (first special symbol display device)
904B ... Special symbol display device (second special symbol display device)
905 ... Image display device 906A ... Winning ball device 906B ... Variable winning ball device 907 ... Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R ... Speaker 909 ... Game effect lamp 9010 ... General winning opening 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 9013 ... Voice Control board 9014 ... Lamp control board 9015 ... Relay board 9020 ... Ordinary pattern display 9021 ... Gate switch 9022A, 9022B ... Start opening switch 9023 ... Count switch 9030 ... Hitting ball operation handle 9031A ... Stick controller 9031B ... Push button 9032 ... Movable body 90100 ... Game control microcomputers 90101, 90121 ... ROM
90102, 90122 ... RAM
90103 ... CPU
90104, 90124 ... Random number circuits 90105, 90125 ... I / O
90120 ... CPU for production control
90123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state,
A variable display device that variably displays identification information based on the fact that the game medium has won the winning device, and derives and displays the display result,
Hold storage means for storing hold information about variable display that has not yet started,
In a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, a promotion notification means for executing a promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the winning device,
When the number of pieces of hold information stored by the hold storage means reaches the upper limit number of hold information that can be stored in the hold storage means in the predetermined period, arrival notification is executed to indicate that the upper limit number has been reached. Notification means,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
A title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The game machine characterized in that the title notifying means is capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestive effect.